MMultiFForSmat-S2wit0che0r S0ystemSystem
(With MKS-2010/MKS-2015/MKS-2017 Control Panel)
User’s Guide [English]
1st Edition (Revised 1)
Software Version 2.00 and Later
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on
Basic Operations (2): Video Switching on
Systems.................................................47
Selecting Video in the M/E Cross-Point
Downstream Key/Fade to Black Control
Power Indicators, “Memory Stick” Slot, USB
Selecting Video in the PGM/PST Cross-Point
Selecting Video in the AUX Bus Control
Selecting the Transition Type and the Next
Selecting Effects With the Flexi Pad Control
Changing the Position and Size of Effect
Changing Pattern Position and Size With the
Changing Pattern Size and Position From
Softening Video Edges (Soft Edge/Soft
Table of Contents
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inserting Text With a Luminance Key or
Selecting Input Signals for Frame Memory ....
Freezing Images and Saving Them to Memory
Recalling Freeze Images Saved in Frame
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a
Composing a Video border Color From Two
Saving, Recalling, and Deleting Effect
Batch Operating on Data Files of Selected
4
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Operations – Selecting the Frame
144
System Adjustments (System Adjust Menu)...
System Reset and Memory Initialization
Settings Relating to Video Switching
Macro Execution Mode Settings (Macro
External Device Connection Port Setup
Manual VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR
Checking VTR, Disk Recorder, and Extended
Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File Operations
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX
Setting the Startup Mode (Startup Mode
Output Signal Assignment (Output Assign
Assigning Signals to Cross-Point Buttons
Displaying Version Information (Version
Displaying Detail Information (Detail
Manually Installing Software (Manual Install
Entering an Installation Key (License Menu) .
Setting the Date and Time (Date/Time Menu)
Table of Contents
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Chapter
Introduction
System Features
This manual is the User’s Guide for the MFS-2000 Multi
Format Switcher system.
The MFS-2000 system is a compact multi-format switcher
system supporting numerous HD and SD signal formats.
The principal features of this system are as follows.
The MFS-2000 system is comprised of the MFS-2000
Multi Format Switcher Processor, the main unit, and
optional system devices such as control panels and system
boards.
In place of the official device names, this manual refers to
the devices in the system by the names shown in the
following table.
Multi-format support
Support for the 480i/59.94 and 576i/50 formats is standard.
The optional BZS-2000M Switcher Upgrade Software can
be installed to provide support for the following formats.
• 1080i/50, 59.94
• 1080PsF/23.976, 24, 25, 29.97
Official device name
Name used in this manual
• 720p/59.94
MFS-2000 Multi Format
Switcher Processor
Switcher or processor
State of the art special effects
MKS-2010 1 M/E Control
Panel
Control panel or 1 M/E
panel
In its standard configuration, the system supports a wide
variety of effect patterns, including advanced wipes.
Installation of the optional MKS-2470 DME Board Set
makes a further array of advanced effects available, such
as flip tumble, page turn, and 2ch P in P (two-channel
picture-in-picture).
MKS-2015 1.5 M/E Control
Panel
Control panel or 1.5 M/E
a)
panel
MKS-2017 1.5 M/E Wide
Control Panel
Control panel or 1.5 M/E
a)
wide panel
MKS-2470 DME Board Set
DME or DME option
Comprehensive keying capabilities
DCU-8000 Device Control Unit DCU or MKS-8700
(MKS-8700)
The system is equipped with two keyers and two
downstream keyers. All keyers support chroma keying and
special key transitions, independent of background
transitions (“independent key transitions”).
DCU-2000 Device Control Unit DCU or MKS-2700
(MKS-2700)
a) The term “1.5 M/E system” refers to systems using either the 1.5 M/E
panel or the 1.5 M/E wide panel.
Optimal for use in live broadcast
environment
Compact and lightweight
Both control panels and processor are compact and
lightweight, designed for use where space is limited. This
is the optimal system for use in small-scale outdoor
broadcast vans and editing suites.
Introduction / System Features
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outstanding ease of use
Buttons and other controls on the control panels are
grouped in easy to understand functional blocks,
facilitating the quick decisions that must be made in a live
broadcast environment.
The menu control block features a 6.5-type color LCD
touch panel, for quick menu operation.
Options
The following options are available for the MFS-2000
system.
• MKS-2010 1 M/E Control Panel
• MKS-2015 1.5 M/E Control Panel
• MKS-2017 1.5 M/E Wide Control Panel
• MKS-2110M Input/Output Connector Board
• MKS-2470 DME Board Set
Selection of optimal control panel
Any of the following three control panels can be selected
for the optimal match to the intended applications and
working environment.
• MKS-2010
• MKS-2440 Frame Memory Board Set
• MKS-2420M Color Corrector Board
• BZS-2000M Switcher Upgrade Software
• BZS-2470M DME Upgrade Software
• BZS-2440M Frame Memory Upgrade Software
• HK-PSU02 Power Supply Unit (for MFS-2000)
• HK-PSU11 Power Supply Unit (for control panels)
• MKS-2015
• MKS-2017
control panels.
For more information about the above options, refer to the
MFS-2000-C Operation Manual supplied with the MFS-
2000 Multi Format Switcher Processor.
• MKS-2700 Device Control Unit
• MKS-8700 Device Control Unit
For more information about the above options, refer to the
DCU-2000 or DCU-8000 Operation Manual supplied
with the DCU-2000 or DCU-8000 Device Control Unit
Pack.
• MKS-2050 Editing Keyboard
• MKS-8050 Editing Keyboard
• BZS-8050 Editing Control Software
For more information about the above options, refer to the
MKS-2050/8050 Operation Manual supplied with the
MKS-2050/8050 Editing Keyboard and the BZS-8050
User’s Guide.
• MKS-8080 AUX Bus Remote Panel
• MKS-8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel
For more information about the above options, refer to the
MKS-8080/8082 Operation Guide or Operation Manual
supplied with the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote
Panel.
Note that the MKS-8080/8082 Operation Manual is
supplied as a PDF file unlike the MKS-8080/8082
Operation Guide. For more information about the MKS-
8080/8082 Operation Manual, contact the Sony dealer
from whom you purchased the MKS-8080/8082.
8
Options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Names and Functions of
Parts
Chapter
Control Panel Types
In this system, you can use any one of the three control
panels shown on the following page. This manual refers to
these control panels by the names shown in parentheses ( )
in the figure on that page.
Control Panel Types
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EFFECT
MENU
A
POWER
B
M/E
1CH
M/E
2CH
P/P
MENU
TOP/
SHUT
DOWN
BVLD
EDGE
TRAIL/
SHDW
LIGHT
SOFT
REV
REG
FILE
BORD
N/R
CROP
POS
CTR
SET
UP
DIAG
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFFECT
EFF/
WIPE
MENU
M/E
A
POWER
B
M/E
1CH
M/E
2CH
MENU
TOP/
SHUT
DOWN
SAFE
TITLE
EDIT
GPI
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
BVLD
EDGE
TRAIL/
SHDW
LIGHT
SOFT
REV
REG
FILE
1
AUX DELEGATION
STORE
MCRO
BORD
N/R
CROP
POS
EDIT
PVW
SRC
BUS
XP/KY
HOLD
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
DSK1
AUX4
UTIL
KEY
SHIFT
PGM
AUTO
TRNS
EFF
DISS
10
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
CTR
SET
UP
FRAME
MEM
KEY1
KEY2
DSK2
CCR1
CCR2
M/E
DIAG
AUX
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
COLOR
BKGD
KEY
PRIOR
BLACK
OVER OVER
M/E
EFF
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
SAFE
TITLE
XPT
HOLD
EDIT
GPI
SNAP
SHOT
SHIFT
ALL
NEXT TRANSITION
M/E
1
PST
COLOR
BKGD
KEY1
ON
KEY2
ON
STORE
MCRO
DEVICE/UTILITY
DEV1 DEV2
MACRO
MIX
EFF
COLOR
MIX
BLACK
ALL
STOP
START
TC
PRE
MCRO
POST
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
AUTO
TRNS
EFF
DISS
PLAY
STOP
CUE
SHTL
JOG
10
TRANSITION TYPE
A
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
AUX DELEGATION
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
TRANS
EDIT
PVW
SRC
BUS
XP/KY
HOLD
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
DSK1
AUX4
DSK2
UTIL
KEY
SHIFT
PGM
B
KEY1
KEY2
FRAMES
FRAME
MEM
KEY1
KEY2
CCR1
CCR2
M/E
OVER OVER
DEVICE/UTILITY
MACRO
AUX
FTB
FTB
COLOR
BKGD
KEY
PRIOR
KEY1
ON
KEY2
ON
ALL
STOP
START
TC
PRE
MCRO
POST
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
BLACK
DEV1
DEV2
PLAY
STOP
CUE
SHTL
JOG
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
PST
COLOR
MIX
DSK
PVW
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
DSK
PVW
SHIFT
SHIFT
NEXT TRANSITION
PGM/PST
M/E
PST
COLOR
BKGD
COLOR
BKGD
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
BLACK
M/E
M/E
BLACK
MIX
EFF
COLOR
MIX
MIX
WIPE
PGM
TRANSITION TYPE
A
TRANSITION TYPE
COLOR
BKGD
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
COLOR
BKGD
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BLACK
BLACK
TRANS
TRANS
PST
B
FRAMES
DSK1
DSK2
FRAMES
DSK1
DSK2
MKS-2015 Control Panel (1.5 M/E panel)
MKS-2010 Control Panel (1 M/E panel)
EFFECT
MENU
A
POWER
B
M/E
1CH
M/E
2CH
P/P
MENU
TOP/
SHUT
DOWN
BVLD
EDGE
TRAIL/
SHDW
LIGHT
SOFT
REV
REG
FILE
BORD
N/R
CROP
POS
CTR
SET
UP
DIAG
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF
/WIPE
M/E
SAFE
TITLE
EDIT
GPI
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
1
AUX DELEGATION
STORE
MCRO
EDIT
PVW
SRC
BUS
XP/KY
HOLD
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
DSK1
AUX4
UTIL
KEY
SHIFT
AUTO
TRNS
EFF
DISS
10
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
FRAME
MEM
KEY1
KEY2
DSK2
CCR1
CCR2
M/E
PGM
AUX
COLOR
BKGD
KEY
PRIOR
BLACK
OVER OVER
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
NEXT TRANSITION
M/E
PST
COLOR
MIX
COLOR
BKGD
KEY1
ON
KEY2
ON
BLACK
MIX
EFF
TRANSITION TYPE
A
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
TRANS
B
KEY1
KEY2
FRAMES
DEVICE/UTILITY
MACRO
FTB
ALL
STOP
START
TC
PRE
MCRO
POST
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
DEV1
DEV2
PLAY
STOP
CUE
SHTL
JOG
PST
COLOR
MIX
DSK
PVW
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
PGM/PST
COLOR
BKGD
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
BLACK
M/E
M/E
MIX
WIPE
PGM
TRANSITION TYPE
COLOR
BKGD
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BLACK
TRANS
PST
FRAMES
DSK1
DSK2
MKS-2017 Wide Control Panel (1.5 M/E wide panel)
b) The 1.5 M/E panel and the 1.5 M/E wide panel differ in the number of
cross-point buttons. They are identical in all other respects.
Principal differences
The principal differences between the three control panels
are as follows.
Operation button positions
The positions of some operation buttons on the 1 M/E
panel are different from the positions of the buttons with
the same functions on the 1.5 M/E panel and 1.5 M/E wide
panel. This manual explains how to operate using the 1.5
M/E panel, but figures are also provided for the 1 M/E
panel when the buttons employed are in different
positions.
Control panel
PGM/PST cross- Number of cross-
point control
block, PGM/PST
transition control
block
point buttons
1 M/E panel
No
12 per row
a)
1.5 M/E panel
Yes
12 per row
a)
1.5 M/E wide
panel
Yes
20 per row
10
Control Panel Types
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control Panel Configuration
1.5 M/E panel and 1.5 M/E wide panel
The sole difference between these control panels is the
number of cross-point buttons per row. Most of the
illustrations in this manual show the configuration of the
1.5 M/E panel.
See the pages in parentheses ( ) for the functions of the
illustrated parts.
EFFECT
MENU
A
POWER
B
M/E
1CH
M/E
2CH
P/P
MENU
TOP/
SHUT
DOWN
BVLD
EDGE
TRAIL/
SHDW
LIGHT
SOFT
REV
REG
FILE
BORD
N/R
CROP
POS
CTR
SET
UP
DIAG
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
SAFE
TITLE
EDIT
GPI
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
1
AUX DELEGATION
STORE
MCRO
EDIT
PVW
SRC
BUS
XP/KY
HOLD
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
DSK1
AUX4
DSK2
UTIL
KEY
SHIFT
PGM
AUTO
TRNS
EFF
DISS
10
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
FRAME
MEM
KEY1
KEY2
CCR1
CCR2
M/E
AUX
COLOR
BKGD
KEY
PRIOR
BLACK
OVER OVER
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
NEXT TRANSITION
M/E
PST
COLOR
MIX
COLOR
BKGD
KEY1
ON
KEY2
ON
MIX
EFF
BLACK
TRANSITION TYPE
A
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
TRANS
B
KEY1
KEY2
FRAMES
DEVICE/UTILITY
MACRO
FTB
ALL
STOP
START
TC
PRE
MCRO
POST
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
DEV1
DEV2
PLAY
STOP
CUE
SHTL
JOG
PST
COLOR
MIX
DSK
PVW
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
PGM/PST
COLOR
BKGD
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
BLACK
M/E
M/E
MIX
WIPE
PGM
TRANSITION TYPE
COLOR
BKGD
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BLACK
TRANS
PST
FRAMES
DSK1
DSK2
Control Panel Configuration
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 M/E panel
See the pages in parentheses ( ) for the functions of the
illustrated parts.
EFFECT
MENU
A
POWER
B
M/E
1CH
M/E
2CH
MENU
TOP/
SHUT
DOWN
BVLD
EDGE
TRAIL/
SHDW
LIGHT
SOFT
REV
REG
FILE
BORD
N/R
CROP
POS
CTR
SET
UP
DIAG
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
M/E
EFF
SAFE
TITLE
EDIT
GPI
SNAP
SHOT
ALL
1
STORE
MCRO
DEVICE/UTILITY
DEV1 DEV2
MACRO
ALL
STOP
START
TC
PRE
MCRO
POST
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
AUTO
TRNS
EFF
DISS
PLAY
STOP
CUE
SHTL
JOG
10
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
AUX DELEGATION
EDIT
PVW
SRC
BUS
XP/KY
HOLD
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
DSK1
AUX4
DSK2
UTIL
KEY
SHIFT
PGM
FRAME
MEM
KEY1
KEY2
CCR1
CCR2
M/E
OVER OVER
AUX
FTB
COLOR
BKGD
KEY
PRIOR
KEY1
ON
KEY2
ON
BLACK
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
XPT
HOLD
DSK
PVW
SHIFT
NEXT TRANSITION
M/E
PST
COLOR
MIX
COLOR
BKGD
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
BLACK
MIX
EFF
TRANSITION TYPE
A
COLOR
BKGD
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BLACK
TRANS
B
FRAMES
DSK1
DSK2
M/E Cross-Point Control Block
Use the M/E (mix/effect) cross-point control block to
select the video signals to be used as the video background.
12
Control Panel Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Cross-point button rows
2 XPT HOLD button
3 SHIFT button
Background A row
XPT
SHIFT
HOLD
M/E
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
A
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
B
4 Tally indicators
Background B row
a Cross-point button rows
Select background video by pressing the corresponding
selects the same signal as the fifth button from left in the B
row.
button.
The buttons in the background A row select the
background video which is output before the start of a
transition (A bus video). Pressing a button selects the
signal assigned to that button (input signals to the IN1 to
You can use the Xpt Assign menu to freely change the
assignment of signals to cross-point buttons.
1)
IN16 connectors of the processor, or signals which the
processor generates internally). The button lights in red
(high tally) if the selected signal is being output to the
program video (final output video). Otherwise it lights in
amber (low tally).
Cross-point button numbers
On the 1 M/E panel and the 1.5 M/E panel, there are 12
cross-point buttons in each row. On the 1.5 M/E wide
panel, there are 20 cross-point buttons in each row. These
buttons are numbered 1 to 12 or 1 to 20 from the left side
of the panel. Pressing the [SHIFT] button 3 to turn the
shift function on makes more cross-point button numbers
available: numbers 13 to 24, or 21 to 40. This manual
refers to the buttons available when the shift function is on
as “shift side buttons,” and to the buttons available when
the shift function is off as “non-shift side buttons.”
1) The MKS-2110M Input/Output Connector Board must be installed to use
the IN9 to IN16 connectors.
The buttons in the background B row select the
background video which is output after a transition (B bus
video). The button lights in red (high tally) if the selected
signal is being output to the program video. It lights in
amber (low tally) if the selected signal is not being output
to the program video.
button numbers.
In addition to the operating mode described above (flip-
flop mode), you can also select bus fixed mode. In bus
fixed mode, the signal selected on the background A row
is always output when the fader lever is at the top, and the
signal selected on the background B row is always output
when the fader lever is at the bottom.
b XPT (cross-point) HOLD button
By pressing this button to turn it on (it lights in amber), you
can recall a snapshot while retaining the current cross-
point button selection state. (The cross-point selection
information in the snapshot is ignored.)
For more information about bus fixed mode, see “Setting
c SHIFT button
Press this button, turning it on, to use the cross-point
buttons as shift side buttons. Press it again, turning it off,
to use the cross-point buttons as non-shift side buttons.
The buttons in the A row and the B row select the same
signals. For example, the fifth button from left in the A row
Control Panel Configuration
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information about operations to use the
rightmost buttons as [SHIFT] buttons, see “To use the
Note
This button does not light and does not function when you
are using the rightmost buttons in the cross-point button
rows (the 12th or 20th buttons) as [SHIFT] button.
d Tally indicators
Currently not used.
PGM/PST Cross-Point Control Block
Use the PGM/PST (program/preset) cross-point control
block to select the video signals to be used as the
background in program video (final output video).
This control block is found only on the 1.5 M/E and 1.5 M/
E wide panels.
1 Cross-point button rows
2 XPT HOLD button
3 SHIFT button
PGM row
XPT
SHIFT
HOLD
PGM/PST
COLOR
M/E
BLACK
BKGD
PGM
COLOR
M/E
BLACK
BKGD
PST
M/E buttons
PST row
4 Tally indicator
a Cross-point button rows
c SHIFT button
The buttons in the PGM (program) row select the
background video which is output before the start of a
transition. The buttons in the PST (preset) row select the
background video after the end of a transition.
The signals selectable with the cross-point buttons are the
same as the signals selectable with the corresponding
The meaning of the colors in which buttons light and
button numbers are also the same. The [M/E] buttons at the
right edge of each cross-point button row are reentry
buttons. They allow you to import video created in the M/
E block and use it as background video in the PGM/PST
block.
Press this button, turning it on, to use the cross-point
buttons as shift side buttons. Press it again, turning it off,
to use the cross-point buttons as non-shift side buttons
Note
This button does not light and does not function when you
are using the rightmost buttons in the cross-point button
rows (the 12th or 20th buttons) as [SHIFT] button.
For more information about operations to use the
rightmost buttons as [SHIFT] buttons, see “To use the
b XPT (cross-point) HOLD button
d Tally indicator
Currently not used.
By pressing this button to turn it on (it lights in amber), you
can recall a snapshot while retaining the current cross-
point button selection state. (The cross-point selection
information in the snapshot is ignored.)
14
Control Panel Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUX Bus Control Block
Use this block to select key signals and to select the signals
to which a variety of functions are applied.
2 SRC BUS button
3 KEY button
4 XP/KY HOLD button
5 SHIFT button
1 AUX delegation buttons
AUX DELEGATION
EDIT
PVW
SRC
BUS
XP/KY
HOLD
AUX1
AUX2
KEY2
AUX3
DSK1
AUX4
DSK2
UTIL
KEY
SHIFT
FRAME
MEM
KEY1
CCR1
CCR2
M/E
PGM
AUX
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
6 Cross-point button row
a AUX delegation buttons
Buttons which target two buses ([KEY1], [KEY2],
[DSK1], [DSK2], and [FRAME MEM]) light in red if
signals on either of the buses are being output to program
video.
By pressing one of the following buttons, lighting it, you
select the bus to which the cross-point button row 6 is
assigned. Signals selected in the cross-point button row are
output to the bus selected here.
The buses selectable by the various buttons are as follows.
AUX1 to 4: AUX1 to AUX4 buses
EDIT PVW: EDIT PVW (edit preview) bus
UTIL: Utility bus
KEY1: Key1 bus or Key1 Source bus. (The state of the
[SRC BUS] button 2 determines which of the two
buses is selected.)
KEY2: Key2 bus or Key2 Source bus. (The state of the
[SRC BUS] button 2 determines which of the two
buses is selected.)
DSK1: DSK1 (downstream key 1) bus or DSK1 Source
(downstream key 1 source) bus. (The state of the
[SRC BUS] button 2 determines which of the two
buses is selected.)
DSK2: DSK2 (downstream key 2) bus or DSK2 Source
(downstream key 2 source) bus. (The state of the
[SRC BUS] button 2 determines which of the two
buses is selected.)
CCR1 and CCR2: CCR1 (color correction 1) or CCR2
bus
FRAME MEM: Frame Memory Video bus, or Frame
Memory Key bus. (The state of the [SRC BUS] button
2 determines which of the two buses is selected.)
b SRC (source) BUS button
When an AUX delegation button which targets two buses
([KEY1], [KEY2], [DSK1], [DSK2], and [FRAME
MEM]) is turned on, the bus which is actually selected is
determined by whether this button is on (lit) or off (not lit).
AUX delegation
button
SRC BUS button SRC BUS button
off
on
KEY1
Key1 bus
Key2 bus
DSK1 bus
DSK2 bus
Key1 Source bus
Key2 Source bus
DSK1 Source bus
DSK2 Source bus
KEY2
DSK1
DSK2
FRAME MEM
Frame Memory
Video bus
Frame Memory
Key bus
c KEY button
In the following cases, you can select the key signal in the
cross-point button row by pressing this button to turn it on.
• When the AUX delegation button [AUX1], [AUX2],
[AUX3] or [AUX4] is lit.
• When the AUX delegation button [KEY1], [KEY2],
[DSK1], [DSK2], or [FRAME MEM] is lit with the
[SRS BUS] button being on.
The button lights in red (high tally) if signals on the
selected bus are being output to the program video (final
output video). Otherwise it lights in amber (low tally).
d XP/KY (cross-point/key) HOLD button
By pressing this button to turn it on (it lights in amber), you
can recall a snapshot while retaining the current cross-
point selection state (cross-point hold), for buses other
Control Panel Configuration
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
than key buses. For key buses, you can select any of the
following three options as the operating mode when a
snapshot is recalled with this button on.
• Cross-point hold (retain the current cross-point selection
state)
• Key disable (retain the current key settings)
• Key disable, plus retention of the current key on/off
states
f Cross-point button row
These buttons select the signals to be output to the bus
selected with the AUX delegation buttons.
The signals which can be selected with each cross-point
button are the same as the signals selected by the
corresponding buttons in the M/E cross-point control
the colors in which the buttons light are the same as those
of the buttons in the M/E cross-point control block.
However, the cross-point button row in the AUX bus
control block contains an [M/E] button and a [PGM]
button, which are not present in the M/E cross-point button
rows. The [M/E] button selects the M/E program video,
and the [PGM] button selects the program video (final
output video).
173) for more information about how to set the operating
mode.
e SHIFT button
Press this button, turning it on, to use the cross-point
buttons as shift side buttons. Press this button again,
turning it off, to use the cross-point buttons as non-shift
side buttons.
M/E Transition Control Block
Use this block to control transitions in M/E (mix/effect)
program video.
1 Transition execution section
2 Next transition selection buttons
3 OVER indicators
3 OVER indicators
5 KEY1 ON and KEY2
ON buttons
OVER OVER
KEY
PRIOR
KEY
PRIOR
KEY1
ON
KEY2
ON
OVER OVER
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
NEXT TRANSITION
PST
COLOR
MIX
PST
COLOR
MIX
MIX
EFF
MIX
EFF
TRANSITION TYPE
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
CUT
AUTO
CUT
TRANS
TRANS
FRAMES
FRAMES
4 Transition type
selection buttons
4 Transition type
selection buttons
1 Transition execution
section
2 Next transition
selection buttons
M/E transition control
block on 1.5 M/E panel
and 1.5 M/E wide panel
M/E transition control
block on 1 M/E panel
16
Control Panel Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a Transition execution section
c OVER indicators
When key 1 and key 2 are inserted, the OVER indicator for
the key on top lights.
(This figure shows the transition execution section on the
1.5 M/E and 1.5 M/E wide panels.)
Transition indicator
d Transition type selection buttons
To select the type of transition, press one of the following
buttons, turning it on.
MIX: In a background transition, the new video overlaps
the current video, finally replacing it. During the
transition, the sum of the output levels of the A bus and
the B bus is maintained at 100%.
Fader lever
In a key transition, the key fades in (for insertion) or
out (for removal).
EFF (effect): A transition using the selected effect pattern
is executed.
AUTO
CUT
TRANS
FRAMES
information about how to select effects.
Transition rate display section
PST (preset) COLOR MIX : This is a two-stage mix
(dissolve), comprising two transitions. In the first
transition, a color matte is gradually mixed into the
current video. In the second transition, the new video
is gradually mixed into the color matte.
Fader lever: Move the lever up and down to execute the
transition.
Transition indicator: Displays the progress of the
transition with 24 LEDs. The number of lit LEDs
increases as the transition proceeds.
You can perform both of these operations in a single
transition.
Transition rate display section: Displays the specified
transition rate (the time from the start to the end of the
transition, in units of frames).
For details, see “Setting a Preset Color Mix” (page
175).
e KEY1 ON and KEY2 ON buttons
information about how to specify transition rates.
Press the corresponding button to instantly insert or delete
key 1 or key 2. The [KEY1 ON] button lights in red when
key 1 is inserted into the program video (final output
video). Otherwise it lights in amber. The [KEY2 ON]
button works in the same way.
AUTO TRANS (transition) button: Press to execute a
transition automatically at the specified transition rate.
The transition begins immediately, and the button
lights in amber. The button goes out when the
transition finishes.
PGM/PST Transition Control Block
CUT button: Press to execute an instant transition.
Use this block to control program transitions.
This control block is provided only on the 1.5 M/E and 1.5
M/E wide panels.
b Next transition selection buttons
To specify which part of the video to switch (change) in
the next transition, press one of the following buttons,
turning it on.
BKGD (background): Switches the background video in
the next transition.
KEY1, KEY2: Press the [KEY1] button, turning it on, to
insert key 1 into the background in the next transition,
or to delete it from the background. If key 1 is not
currently inserted, the transition inserts it. If key 1 is
currently inserted, the transition deletes it. The
[KEY2] button works in the same way.
KEY PRIOR (priority): When key 1 and key 2 are
inserted in an overlapping state, the key on top appears
in front on the monitor. By pressing this button,
turning it on, you can reverse the priority of the two
keys in the next transition.
Control Panel Configuration
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
panel, where they are located in the M/E transition control
1 Transition execution section
KEY1
ON
KEY2
ON
1 KEY1 ON and KEY2 ON buttons
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
PST
COLOR
MIX
2 AUTO TRANS buttons
KEY1
KEY2
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
CUT
TRANS
a KEY1 ON and KEY2 ON buttons
Press the corresponding button to instantly insert or delete
key 1 or key 2. The [KEY1 ON] button lights in red when
key 1 is inserted into the program video (final output
video). Otherwise it lights in amber. The [KEY2 ON]
button works in the same way.
FRAMES
2 Transition type selection buttons
b AUTO TRANS (transition) buttons
a Transition execution section
Press the corresponding button to insert or delete key 1 or
key 2 at the specified transition rate. The key fades in
(insert) or fades out (delete). The transition begins as soon
as the button is pressed, and the button lights in amber. The
button goes out when the transition finishes.
This works in the same way as the transition execution
b Transition type selection buttons
To select the type of transition, press one of the following
buttons, turning it on.
information about how to specify transition rates.
MIX: In a background transition, the new video overlaps
the current video, finally replacing it. During the
transition, the sum of the output levels of the PGM bus
and the PST bus is maintained at 100%.
WIPE: A transition using the selected wipe pattern is
executed, so that the new video wipes away the current
video.
Downstream Key/Fade to Black
Control Block
Use this block to insert and delete downstream keys, and
to fade to black.
On how to select a wipe pattern, see “Selecting
PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first transition, a color
matte is gradually mixed into the current video. In the
second transition, the new video is gradually mixed
into the color matte.
FTB
1 FTB button
You can perform both of these operations in a single
transition.
DSK
PVW
2 DSK PVW button
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
For details, see “Setting a Preset Color Mix” (page
175).
3 DSK independent transition
execution section
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
M/E Key Transition Control Block
DSK1
DSK2
Use this block to insert and delete keys in independent M/
E background video transitions. The transitions are
independent of the transitions performed with the M/E
This control block is provided only on the 1.5 M/E and 1.5
M/E wide panels. However, of the four buttons, the [KEY1
ON] and [KEY2 ON] buttons are also found on the 1 M/E
a FTB (fade to black) button
Press this button to execute a fade to black at the specified
transition rate. The button lights in amber when pressed. It
lights in red when the fade to black is completed, for as
long as black is output.
18
Control Panel Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information about how to specify transition rates.
information about how to specify transition rates.
b DSK PVW (downstream key preview) button
You can press this button, turning it on, to temporarily
switch M/E PVW output (1 M/E panel) or PST output (1.5
M/E panel) to DSK PVW output.
Flexi Pad Control Block
Use the Flexi Pad control block in the following four
operation modes.
• Effect snapshot mode
• Snapshot mode
• Macro mode
Note
Whether or not this switching function is available
depends on a setting made in the Output Assign menu. For
details, see “Switching M/E PVW or PST output to DSK
• Transition rate input mode
Depending on the operation mode, this control block
allows you to do the following.
c DSK independent transition execution section
DSK1 ON, DSK2 ON buttons: Press the [DSK1 ON]
button to cut downstream key 1 in or out (insert or
delete it instantly). The button lights in red when the
key is inserted in program video (final output video).
Otherwise it lights in amber. The [DSK2 ON] button
works in the same way.
In effect snaphot mode:
• Recall, save, and delete effect snapshots
• Recall effect pattern numbers
In snaphot mode:
• Recall, save, and delete snapshots
AUTO TRANS buttons: Press the corresponding button
to insert or delete downstream key 1 or 2 at the
specified transition rate. The key is mixed to fade in
(insert) or out (delete). The transition begins as soon as
the button is pressed, and the button lights in amber.
When the transition finishes, the button goes out.
• Set snapshot attributes
In macro mode:
Recall (execute), save, delete, and edit macros
In transition rate input mode:
Enter transition rates
1 Numeric display
7
8
5
9
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
4
1
0
6
3
2 Region selection buttons
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
2
3 STORE button
STORE
MCRO
TC
ENTR
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
4 BANK SEL button
6 Memory recall buttons
5 Mode selection buttons
This figure shows the Flexi Pad control block
in transition rate input mode.
a Numeric display
In transition rate input mode: Transition rate
Macro mode
• In macro recall mode: A bank number and register
Depending on the operation mode, this shows an effect
pattern number, a bank number, a register number, an
event number, an event total, a pause duration, or a
transition rate, in up to four digits.
number
• In macro edit mode: An event number and an event
total
In effect snapshot mode: Pattern number
In snapshot mode: Bank number and register number
• In pause duration entry mode: A pause duration
Control Panel Configuration
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b Region selection buttons
Used in modes other than macro mode.
Select the target function block of the operation. The
button which is on lights in amber.
In effect snapshot mode: Comprised of the [0] to [9]
buttons, a [PTN NO. (pattern number)] button, and an
[ENTR (enter)] button.
M/E button: Selects the M/E region.
The state and functions of the [0] to [9] buttons and the
[ENTR] button change depending on the state of the
[PTN NO.] button and the [STORE] button.
PP/ALL (PGM/PST/all) button (on 1.5 M/E panel): In
snapshot mode, selects all regions. In transition rate
input mode and effect snapshot mode, selects the
PGM/PST region.
ALL button (on 1 M/E panel): In snapshot mode, selects
all regions. Has no effect in transition rate input mode
and effect snapshot mode.
For details, see “Selecting Effects With the Flexi Pad
In snapshot mode: Comprised of the [0] to [9] buttons, an
[EFF DISS (effect dissolve)] button, and an [AUTO
TRNS (transition)] button. The state and functions of
these buttons change depending on the state of the
[BANK SEL] button and the [STORE] button.
c STORE button
Used in modes other than transition rate input mode.
This button lights in amber when on, to indicate that you
can save the current snapshot or effect snapshot, enter
macro edit mode, or delete a saved snapshot, effect
snapshot, or macro.
For details, see “Saving Snapshots” (page 125).
In macro mode
d BANK SEL (selection) button
• In macro recall mode: Comprised of the [0] to [9]
buttons, an [Executed events/Total Events] button,
and a [TAKE] button. The state and functions of the
buttons change depending on the states of the
[BANK SEL] and [STORE] buttons.
• In macro edit mode: Comprised of the [INS (insert)]
button, [MOD (modify)] button, [DEL (delete)]
button, [PAUS (pause)] button, [ALL (select all)]
button, [EXIT] button, [AUTO INS (auto insert)]
button, [STOR/Register Number (Store/register
number)] button, [<< PREV (goto previous event)]
button, and [NEXT >> (goto next event)] button.
• In pause time entry mode: Comprised of the [0] to
[9] buttons, a [CLR (clear)] button, and a [PAUS/
ENTR (pause/enter)] button.
Used in snapshot mode or macro mode. Has no effect in
other modes.
This button lights in amber when on, to indicate that you
can use the memory recall buttons to specify a snapshot or
macro register bank.
e Mode selection buttons
Select the operation mode of the Flexi Pad control block.
The button currently turned on lights in amber.
EFF/WIPE (effect shapshot): Selects effect snapshot
mode. You can also use this button when selecting
effect patterns.
SNAPSHOT: Selects snapshot mode.
MCRO (macro): Selects macro mode. Lights in amber in
macro recall mode, and lights in red in macro edit
mode.
For details, see “Macros” (page 127).
TRANS RATE: Selects transition rate input mode.
In transition rate input mode: Comprised of the [0] to [9]
f Memory recall buttons
buttons, and an [ENTR (enter)] button.
The configuration of the memory recall buttons changes
according to the operation mode selected with the mode
selection buttons.
For details, see “Setting Transition Rates” (page 69).
Effect/Wipe Control Block
Use this block to set the direction of effects and wipes. You
can also add modifiers as required.
20
Control Panel Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Delegation selection buttons
EFFECT
M/E
1CH
M/E
2CH
P/P
MENU
BVLD
EDGE
TRAIL/
SHDW
LIGHT
SOFT
REV
BORD
N/R
CROP
POS
2 Joystick
CTR
3 Effect modifier buttons
a Delegation selection buttons
Select operation targets.
M/E 1CH (M/E1 channel), M/E 2CH (M/E2 channel)
buttons: Select M/E1 channel or M/E2 channel or
both as the operation target(s).
P/P (PGM/PST) button (on 1.5 M/E panels only):
Selects PGM/PST as the operation target.
MENU button: When this button is on, you can use the
joystick to adjust the lefttmost three parameters
assigned to the knobs in the menu control block.
When the [MENU] button is on, you can use this to adjust
parameters. Operation of the joystick is linked with
operation of the knobs in the menu control block.
Parameter assigned to knob 1: The value increases when
the joystick is moved to the right, and decreases when
the joystick is moved to the left.
Parameter assigned to knob 2: The value increases when
the joystick is moved away from you, and decreases
when the joystick is moved toward you.
Parameter assigned to knob 3: The value increases when
the knob of the joystick is rotated clockwise, and
decreases when it is rotated counterclockwise.
The adjustment range depends on the parameter.
Notes
• The [M/E 2CH] button does not light and cannot be
selected for effect patterns with numbers lower than
2000.
• When the [SHTL] button or [JOG] button in the utility
control block is on, turning a delegation selection button
on turns the [SHTL] button or [JOG] button off. (The
button pressed later receives priority).
When the [SHTL] button or [JOG] button in the utility
control block is on, the joystick can be used to control jog
and shuttle mode search on devices.
Move the joystick to the right for forward direction search,
and left for reverse direction search.
c Effect modifier buttons
b Joystick
BVLD (beveled) EDGE: When this button is on, you can
add beveled edges to the image. This button lights in
green when beveled edge parameters are assigned to
the knobs in the menu control block, and lights in
amber when no beveled edge parameters are assigned
to the knobs.
LIGHT (lighting): When this button is on, you can add a
lighting effect to the image. This button lights in green
when lighting parameters are assigned to the knobs in
the menu control block, and lights in amber when no
lighting parameters are assigned to the knobs.
TRAIL/SHDW (shadow): When this button is on, you
can add a shadow to the image. This button lights in
green when shadow parameters are assigned to the
knobs in the menu control block, and lights in amber
when no shadow parameters are assigned to the knobs.
When one of the [M/E 1CH], [M/E 2CH], and [P/P]
buttons is on, you can use the joystick to adjust the position
of the currently selected effect pattern. For some effect
patterns, the joystick can be used to change their size.
X-axis position: The X value increases when the joystick
is moved to the right, and decreases when the joystick
is moved to the left.
Y-axis position: The Y value increases when the joystick
is moved away from you, and decreases when the
joystick is moved toward you.
Size: The value increases when the knob of the joystick is
rotated clockwise, and decreases when it is rotated
counterclockwise.
Control Panel Configuration
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BORD (border): When this button is on, you can add
borders. The button lights in amber when no border
parameters have been assigned to the knobs in the
menu control block, and lights in green when they
have been assigned.
menu control block, and lights in green when they
have been assigned.
N/R (normal/reverse): When this button is on, it lights in
amber and the transition direction reverses every time
a transition finishes.
SOFT (soft edges): When this button is on, you can add
soft edges. The button lights in amber when no soft
edge parameters have been assigned to the knobs in the
menu control block, and lights in green when they
have been assigned.
CROP button: When this button is on, you can perform
cropping. The button lights in amber when no crop
parameters have been assigned to the knobs in the
REV: When this button is on, it lights in amber and the
transition direction reverses.
POS (position) button: You can turn the positioner on
and use the joystick to move effect patterns in the x-
axis and y-axis directions, and to change their size.
CTR (center) button: When the [POS] button is on,
pressing this button returns an effect pattern to the
default position and size.
Utility Control Block
ENABLE/UTILITY
1 ENABLE/UTILITY operation buttons
SAFE
TITLE
EDIT
GPI
DEVICE/UTILITY
2 DEVICE/UTILITY operation buttons
ALL
STOP
START
TC
DEV1
DEV2
PLAY
STOP
CUE
SHTL
JOG
a ENABLE/UTILITY operation buttons
You can assign utility commands to these buttons.
JOG: Turns jog mode on and off.
The following utility commands are assigned by default.
EDIT button: Enables and disables the switcher edit
mode.
GPI button: Enables and disables switcher GPI.
SAFE TITLE button: Turns on and off a marker showing
the television reception safe area and a cross marker
showing the center of the screen.
Note
When a delegation selection button is on, turning the
[SHTL] or [JOG] button on turns the delegation button off.
(The button pressed later receives priority).
information about how to assign arbitrary utility
commands to these buttons.
Blank button: No function assignment.
information about how to assign arbitrary utility
commands to these buttons.
b DEVICE/UTILITY operation buttons
You can assign utility commands to these buttons.
The following utility commands are assigned by default.
DEV1/DEV2: Selects the Device1/Device2 as control
target.
PLAY: Plays a tape or disk.
STOP: Stops a tape or disk.
ALL STOP: Stops tapes or disks on all devices.
CUE: Cue up.
START TC: Sets the current timecode as the start point.
SHTL: Turns shuttle mode on and off.
22
Control Panel Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Macro Control Block
Menu Control Block
1 Top menu selection buttons
MACRO
Menu display
PRE
MCRO
POST
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
MENU
TOP/
SHUT
DOWN
3 ATTCH ENBL button
2 POST MCRO button
1 PRE MCRO button
REG
FILE
SET
UP
DIAG
a PRE MCRO button
Use this button to set a macro attachment in pre macro
mode.
When you make settings in macro only mode, this button
is used together with the Macro Only Set button, assigned
to one of the buttons in the utility control block.
2 Knobs
a Top menu selection buttons
Select the menu shown in the menu display.
• TOP/SHUTDOWN (top menu/shutdown) button
• REG (register menu) button
• FILE (file menu) button
• SET UP (setup menu) button
b POST MCRO button
Use this button to set a macro attachment in post macro
mode.
When you make settings in macro only mode, this button
is used together with the Macro Only Set button, assigned
to one of the buttons in the utility control block.
• DIAG (diagnostics menu) button
c ATTCH ENBL (attachment enable) button
b Knobs
Use to adjust parameters shown in the menus.
When this button is on, macro attachments assigned to
buttons on the control panel are enabled.
Power Indicators, “Memory Stick”
Slot, USB Connector
A
POWER
B
1 Power A and B status indicators
2 “Memory Stick” status indicator
3 “Memory Stick” slot
4 USB connector
a Power A and B status indicators
Two power supplies (A and B) can be installed in the
control panel. When the control panel is powered on, the
indicators corresponding to the installed power supplies
light in green.
Control Panel Configuration
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a second power supply requires the optional HK-
PSU11 Power Supply Unit.
“Memory Sticks”
b “Memory Stick” status indicator
Lights in red during access to a “Memory Stick.”
Usable “Memory Sticks”
c “Memory Stick” slot
Insert “Memory Sticks.”
The following types of “Memory Stick” can be used with
this system.
about the usable “Memory Sticks” and their handling.
• MSH-32/64/128 “Memory Stick”
• MSX-256S/512S/1GS “Memory Stick PRO”
• MSH-M32N/M64N/M128N “Memory Stick Duo”
• MSX-M256S/M512S “Memory Stick PRO Duo”
d USB connector
Devices compatible with the USB 1.1 standard can be
connected. Currently this connector is not used.
Notes
• When using a “Memory Stick PRO,” high-rate data
transfer using parallel interface is not supported.
• This system does not support the MagicGate function.
• When using a “Memory Stick Duo,” be sure to use it
with a “Memory Stick Duo Adaptor” (MSAC-M2 or
equivalent). If you insert a “Memory Stick Duo” without
using the adaptor, there is the possibility that the stick
cannot be removed, resulting in a serious accident.
Handling “Memory Sticks”
When using “Memory Sticks,” pay attention to the
following points.
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with
anything, including your finger or metallic objects.
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to
the “Memory Stick” labeling position.
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the
labeling position.
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick.”
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick.”
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that
is:
-Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun
-Under direct sunlight
-Very humid or subject to corrosive substances
24
“Memory Sticks”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Menus
Chapter
Accessing Menus
The menus of this switcher enable you to make system settings and settings
related to effects.
To access menus, you can use any of the following three methods.
• Access from the top menu (see next section)
Accessing Menus From the Top Menu
By pressing a top menu selection button in the menu control block (see page
23), you can directly access the menu page for that button. The menus which can
be accessed with top menu selection buttons are as follows.
Menus accessed with top menu selection buttons and their functions
Button
Menu
Function
Reference
page
TOP/SHUTDOWN Top/Shutdown
exit the menu system.
a), b)
REG
Make register settings.
Make file settings.
–
Register
a)
FILE
File
a)
SET UP
Make settings related to
setup, and to display of
error status and error
logs.
Setup/Diagnosis
DIAG
Diagnosis
Display error status and
error logs.
“Error
Messages”
in the
Appendix
(separate
document)
a) The most recently used menu is displayed.
b) Currently not supported.
To access a menu from the top menu, proceed as follows.
Accessing Menus
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
The menu illustrations in this manual may differ in appearance from the menus
actually shown in the menu display of the control panel.
1
Press the [TOP/SHUTDOWN] button in the menu control block.
The top menu appears.
Tip
If you press the [FILE], [SET UP], or [DIAG] button, the page for that
button appears.
2
3
In the Top Menu area, select a menu.
The second-level menu of the menu selected in the Top Menu area appears
in the Sub Menu area.
Select a menu in the Sub Menu area.
If the menu has only two levels, the page for the second-level menu appears.
If the menu has three levels, a popup window appears so that you can select
a third-level menu.
4
Select a menu from the popup window.
The third-level menu appears.
Accessing Menus by Double Clicking
This manual uses the term “double click” to refer to the action of pressing a
button on the control panel twice in rapid succession (comparable to double
clicking a computer mouse button). You can double click many of the buttons
on the control panel except the top menu selection buttons to directly access
menus related to those buttons. The following table shows the buttons which
access menus by double clicking and the accessed menus.
Tip
The ability to access menus by double clicking is indicated by a horizontal bar
on the face of the button, located over the button name.
26
Accessing Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus accessed by double clicking
Button
location
Button
Menu
Referenc
e page
a)
a)
a)
M/E cross-point
control block
Misc >Color Bkgd
COLOR BKGD
a)
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
CCR >CCR1 >Primary
CCR >CCR2 >Primary
Misc >Color Bkgd
FM1 VIDEO
a)
FM1 KEY
a)
FM2 VIDEO
a)
FM2 KEY
a)
FM3 VIDEO
a)
FM3 KEY
a)
CCR1
a)
CCR2
PGM/PST
cross-point
control block
COLOR BKGD
a)
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
CCR >CCR1 >Primary
CCR >CCR2 >Primary
Misc >Color Bkgd
b)
FM1 VIDEO
a)
FM1 KEY
a)
FM2 VIDEO
a)
FM2 KEY
a)
FM3 VIDEO
a)
FM3 KEY
a)
CCR1
a)
CCR2
AUX bus
COLOR BKGD
control block
(cross-point
button rows)
a)
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
Frame Memory >Recall
CCR >CCR1 >Primary
CCR >CCR2 >Primary
FM1 VIDEO
a)
FM1 KEY
a)
FM2 VIDEO
a)
FM2 KEY
a)
FM3 VIDEO
a)
FM3 KEY
a)
CCR1
a)
CCR2
AUX bus
control block
(AUX
delegation
buttons)
KEY1
Key >M/E Key1 >Main
Key >M/E Key2 >Main
Key >DSK1 >Main
KEY2
DSK1
DSK2
Key >DSK2 >Main
CCR1
CCR >CCR1 >Primary
CCR >CCR2 >Primary
Frame Memory >Freeze
CCR2
FRAME MEM
Accessing Menus
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus accessed by double clicking
Button
location
Button
Menu
Referenc
e page
M/E transition
control block
KEY1
KEY2
EFF
Key >M/E Key1 >Main
Key >M/E Key2 >Main
PST COLOR MIX
WIPE
Misc >Transition
–
PGM/PST
transition
control block
Effect/Wipe >P/P Wipe >Main
Misc >Transition
PST COLOR MIX
b)
Flexi Pad
control block
M/E + EFF/WIPE
PP/ALL + EFF/
WIPE
Effect/Wipe >P/P Wipe >Main
Misc >Transition
–
b)
TRANS RATE
M/E 1CH
Effect/Wipe
control block
Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main
M/E 2CH
b)
Effect/Wipe >P/P Wipe >Main
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status
–
P/P
c)
Utility control
block
Device1
c)
Device2
c)
Device3
c)
Device4
c)
Device5
c)
Device6
b) Not found on 1 M/E panel.
Accessing Menus by Single Clicking
A menu appears when you single click a parameter adjustment button to turn the
adjustment function on (and the knobs take on the parameters which can be
assigned for the adjustment). The buttons which access menus by single clicking
are the following buttons in the Effect/Wipe control block.
• [BVLD EDGE] button
• [LIGHT] button
• [TRAIL/SHDW] button
• [BORD] button
• [SOFT] button
• [CROP] button
28
Accessing Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interpreting Menu Screens
There are two types of menu screen.
• Basic screen (see next section)
• Popup windows
Basic Screen
1 Menu page number button
2 Back button
3 Fwd button
4 Menu switch buttons
7 Button area and status area
(The figure shows a button
area only.)
6 Parameter buttons
5 Menu title buttons
a Menu page number button
This shows the menu screen page number.
When you press this button, the page number input window (see page 38)
appears. Enter a page number in that window to display the desired menu.
For details about operation, see “Selecting menus by entering page numbers”
Interpreting Menu Screens
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details about page numbers, refer to “Menu Tree” in the Appendix
(separate document).
b Back button
Returns to the most recently displayed menu. You can go back up to maximum
of 50 menus.
This button is disabled when the display history has been erased and when you
have backed up through the entire display history.
For details about operation, see “Selecting menus from the display history”
c Fwd (forward) button
Redisplays the menu that was visible when you last pressed the Back button.
This button is disabled when the display history has been erased, when you have
moved forward through the entire display history, and when the display history
has been updated by displaying a new menu.
For details about operation, see “Selecting menus from the display history”
d Menu switch buttons
You can use the following buttons to switch between the menus when you have
selected a Key menu or an Effect/Wipe menu.
Main Menu button: Displays a menu with frequently used items.
Detail Menu button: Displays a popup window for selecting menus to make
detailed settings.
e Menu title buttons
Except for the Top button, these buttons display the title of the selected of the
selected menu. The upper buttons correspond to upper level menus. In the
example of the previous figure, [Top] is the top menu, [Key] is a first-level
menu, and [M/E Key1] is a second-level menu.
When you press a button, a popup window appears to allow you to select a menu
from the next level.
For details about operation, see “Selecting by navigating the menu tree” (page
f Parameter buttons
Parameters adjustable by knobs and their values are shown on the buttons.
When you press one of these buttons, the numeric keypad window (see page 33)
opens so that you can enter a setting value.
g Button area and status area
The button area displays the buttons of the operation target items in the selected
menu.
In the setup menu and other menus, a status area may also be displayed to show
lists for selecting setting values (see following figure).
30
Interpreting Menu Screens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status area
Button area
Interpreting buttons
The following figure shows the information displayed on function buttons.
Function name
Lights in light blue when parameters
are assigned to knobs.
Icon
Status display
The following table shows how to interpret other buttons.
Name
Display
State
Parameter
button
Value displayed. Value can be changed.
Execute button
Not executing function.
Executing function (lit in light purple).
Interpreting Menu Screens
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Icons displayed on buttons
The following table shows the icons which are displayed on buttons, and the
functions which they represent. The functions are executed when a button with
the corresponding icon is pressed.
Name
Display
Function
Popup icon
Open a popup window.
Numeric keypad
icon
Open the numeric keypad window, the
timecode window, the hexadecimal keypad
window, or the page number input window.
Keyboard icon
Open the keyboard window.
Shortcut icons
Close icon
Switch the menu display.
Close a popup window.
Scroll icons
• Scroll the function button area.
• Scroll the list in the status area.
• Switch a pattern.
Knob assigner
icon
Assign a parameter to a knob.
Window hold
icon
Do not close a popup window even when a
function selection button is pressed.
Popup Windows
General popup windows
When you press a button with the
screen.
icon, a popup window opens in the basic
The popup window may be the scrolling type. For details, see the next section.
2 Close button
1 Function button area
a Function button area
Displays functions and menus for selection. The currently selected button lights
in light blue.
The popup window closes when you press a button in this area.
32
Interpreting Menu Screens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b Close button
Closes the popup window.
General popup windows (scrolling type)
2 Scroll buttons
1 Function button area
5 Close button
4 Page Up, Page Down buttons
3 Window Hold button
a Function button area
Displays functions and menus for selection.
The popup window closes when you press a button in this area. However, it does
not close if the [Window Hold] button is on.
b Scroll buttons
Scroll the function button area up and down.
c Window Hold button
Press this button, turning it on, if you want to keep the window open even after
pressing a button in the function button area.
d Page Up, Page Down buttons
Scroll the function button area up and down in page units.
e Close button
Closes the popup window (even when the [Window Hold] button is on).
Numeric keypad window/timecode window
The numeric keypad window or timecode window opens when you press a
button which is associated with parameter numeric input or timecode input. The
icon appears on the button.
Interpreting Menu Screens
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Input value display
2 Minimum to maximum display
3 Item display
4 – (minus) button
5 Close button
8 Clear button
7 Enter button
6 Numeric input buttons
a Input value display
Shows the value entered in the numeric keypad window or the timecode
window.
In the timecode window, values are shown in the format HH:MM:SS:FF
(Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames).
About timecode input
• A colon (:) is displayed automatically after every second digit when you enter
three or more digits.
• Timecode is displayed in red if an entered value exceeds the setting range.
Timecode input examples
The following table shows examples of timecode input
Digits entered
[1], [2]
Display
Setting value
12 00:00:00:12
[1], [2], [2], [0]
[1], [2], [2], [0], [5]
12:20 00:00:12:20
1:22:05 00:01:22:05
b Minimum to maximum display
Displays the minimum and maximum values that can be set for the parameter.
Does not display anything in the timecode window.
34
Interpreting Menu Screens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c Item display
Displays the name of the parameter being set in the numeric keypad window or
timecode window.
d – (minus) button
Changes the sign of the input value.
Each press toggles between plus (+) and minus (–).
Not supported in the timecode window.
e Close button
Closes the numeric keypad window or the timecode window.
f Numeric input buttons
Use these buttons to enter the value you want to set.
In the timecode window, the [.] button changes into a [00] button.
g Enter button
Confirms the entered value.
If the value is valid, the numeric keypad window or the timecode window
closes.
If the value is not valid, the window stays open and the color of the input value
display changes to red.
h Clear button
Clears the input. However, parameter settings are not changed.
Hexadecimal keypad window
The hexadecimal keypad window opens when you press a button which is
associated with hexadecimal parameter input. The
button.
icon appears on the
1 Input value display
2 Item display
3 Minimum to maximum display
4 Close button
6 Clear button
5 Enter button
Interpreting Menu Screens
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a Input value display
Shows the value entered in the hexadecimal keypad window.
b Item display
Displays the name of the parameter being set in the hexadecimal keypad
window.
c Minimum to maximum display
Displays the minimum and maximum values that can be set for the parameter.
d Close button
Closes the hexadecimal keypad window.
e Enter button
Confirms the entered value.
If the value is valid, the hexadecimal keypad window closes.
If the value is not valid, the hexadecimal keypad window stays open and the
color of the input value display changes to red.
f Clear button
Clears the input. However, parameter settings are not changed.
Keyboard window
The keyboard window opens in the basic screen when you press a button with
the
icon.
36
Interpreting Menu Screens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Item display
2 Input string display
3 Left button
4 Right button
5 Close button
qa Enter button
q; Del button
9 Clear button
8 BS button
7 Shift button
6 Caps Lock button
a Item display
Shows the name of the parameter being set in the keyboard window.
b Input string display
Shows the character string being input in the keyboard window.
c Left button
Moves the cursor one character to the left in the input string.
d Right button
Moves the cursor one character to the right in the input string.
e Close button
Closes the keyboard window.
f Caps Lock button
Switches between input of capital letters and lowercase letters.
g Shift button
Enables input of characters on the shift side of the buttons. The shift is released
when you enter a character.
h BS (backspace) button
Clears the character immediately before the cursor in the input string.
Interpreting Menu Screens
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i Clear button
Clears all of the characters in the input string.
j Del (delete) button
Clears the character immediately after the cursor in the input string.
k Enter button
Sets the input string as a parameter value.
Closes the keyboard window if the value was valid. If the value was not valid,
the window stays open and the color of the input value display
changes to red.
Page number input window
The page number input window opens in the basic screen when you press a
menu page number button.
1 Input value display
2 Item display
3 Clear button
5 Close button
4 Enter button
a Input value display
Shows the value entered in the page number input window.
b Item display
Shows that the value you are entering is a page number.
c Clear button
Clears the input value.
d Enter button
Confirms the input value.
e Close button
Closes the page number input window.
38
Interpreting Menu Screens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Menu Operations
Selecting Menus
There are three ways to select menus.
• Navigate the menu tree (see next section)
Selecting by navigating the menu tree
You can display a desired menu by navigating to it through the menu tree from
the currently displayed menu.
The following example shows how to select the Color Bkgd menu under the
Misc menu when you are in the Main menu under a Key menu for the M/E bank.
In this manual, menu names and paths are indicated in the fashion “Key >M/E
Key1 >Main.”
Menu tree
Key
ME Key 1
Main
1
3
Effect/Wipe
CCR
Frame Memory
Misc
Transition
Color Bkgd
Enable
DDR/VTR
2
4
1
2
Press [Top].
A popup window for selection of first-level menus appears.
Select [Misc].
The popup window closes and the display changes to the Misc menu. The
display on the second and third menu title buttons from the top changes to
the display of the Misc menu.
3
Press the second menu title button from the top.
A popup window for selection of second-level menus appears.
Basic Menu Operations
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Select [Color Bkgd].
The popup window closes and the display changes to the Color Bkgd menu.
Selecting menus by entering page numbers
You can display a desired menu by entering its page number.
For more information about page numbers, refer to “Menu Tree” in the
Appendix (separate document).
1
2
Press the menu page number button.
Enter the page number of the desired menu and press the [Enter] button.
The page number input window closes and the display changes to the
desired menu.
Selecting menus from the display history
You can redisplay menus that have appeared in the past.
For example, if you have displayed menus in the order 1000 t 2000 t 3000
t 4000, you can go back to menu 2000 by pressing the [Back] button twice.
After using the [Back] button, you can return in the reverse direction by using
the [Fwd] button. In the above example, press the [Fwd] button twice to return
to menu 4000.
Selecting Functions
Setting Parameters
To select a function, press the corresponding button in the button area of the
basic screen.
The selected button lights in light blue.
Depending on the button, a popup window may appear so that you can select
further items. Functions may also be assigned to knobs.
appearance when they are selected.
Parameter buttons light in light blue when they are pressed, and the parameters
are assigned to knobs. Also, the parameter group name appears above the
parameter button group. When you press a button to which a parameter has been
assigned, the numeric keypad window opens so that you can input a numeric
value. Or you may be able to set the parameter by rotating a knob. Parameters
are assigned to knobs 1 to 5 in the order of parameter buttons from the left.
When 6 or more parameters have been assigned, the 5th button functions as a
page switch button (the [More] button). For example, when 8 parameters have
been assigned, buttons 1 to 4 on menu page 1/2 are assigned to knobs 1 to 4
initially, and buttons 5 to 8 on menu page 2/2 are assigned to knobs 1 to 4 by
page switching.
40
Basic Menu Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter group name
Knob 3
Knob 4
Knob 5
Knob 1
Knob 2
Parameter values can be set with either of the following methods.
• Rotate the knobs (1 to 5) corresponding to the parameters.
• Press the parameter button corresponding to a parameter, and enter a numeric
value in the numeric keypad window.
Parameter values are indicated by the length of the bars on the buttons and by
the numeric values under the bars.
In explaining specific operations, this manual gives examples of typical knob
settings, expressed as shown below.
Example 1: When a pattern key is selected
Knob
Description
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
1 to 24
1 (Size)
2 (Soft)
Size of pattern
Softness of edge width
Key density
3 (Density)
4 (Pattern)
Pattern number
Example 2: When a video process is selected
(The buttons of parameter group 1/2 are shown first, changing to parameter
group 2/2 when the [More] button in the position of knob 5 is pressed.
Parameter group 1/2
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Video Gain)
3 (Y Gain)
Overall gain of video signals
Gain of luminance signals
Black level
–200.00 to +200.00
–200.00 to +200.00
–7.30 to +109.58
4 (Black Level)
Parameter group 2/2
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Video Gain)
3 (C Gain)
4 (Hue Delay)
Overall gain of video signals
Gain of chrominance signals
Amount of hue offset
–200.00 to +200.00
–200.00 to +200.00
–180.00 to +180.00
Basic Menu Operations
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exiting the Menu System
To exit the menu system, proceed as follows.
Note
Always exit the menu system before powering the control panel off.
1
2
3
In the menu control block, press the [TOP/SHUTDOWN] button.
The top menu appears.
Press [Shutdown].
A confirmation popup window appears.
Press [Yes].
This shuts down the menu system after a while, and the menu display
changes to black. Now power off the system.
To cancel the exit
Press [No].
To restart the menu system
Power on the control panel once more.
42
Exiting the Menu System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basics of Video
Switching
Chapter
This chapter begins by explaining how to switch background signals on the M/
E bank (how to perform transitions). Then it explains basic background video
switching on the PGM/PST bank when a 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel
is used.
The examples in this chapter assume that the following signals are currently
selectable with the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th cross-point buttons from the left.
Signal selectable with the 2nd button from the left: Landscape
video signal
Signal selectable with the 3rd button from the left: Lion video signal
Signal selectable with the 4th button from the left: Castle video
signal
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on the M/E
Bank
Let’s begin by using the M/E bank to select video signals showing a landscape
and a lion as background video, and to switch between them with an effect.
As the effect, we will use effect number 0024 (circular wipe). A wipe is an effect
which the current video is wiped away by new video using a selected pattern.
The video changes as follows.
Transition start
Transition end
Preparations for operation
• If you are using the 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel, press and light the
[M/E] buttons at the right edge of the PGM and PST button rows of the PGM/
PST cross-point control block.
• Before starting, move the fader lever from one end of its range to the other,
and stop it at the top position.
After finishing the above preparations, proceed as follows.
1
2
3
4 6,7
5
1 2
6,7 3 4
5
1.5 M/E panel
1 M/E panel
44
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on the M/E Bank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
In the background A row of the M/E cross-point control block, select the A
bus video.
For this example, press the 2nd button from the left to select the landscape
video signal.
The landscape video appears on the video monitor connected to the
processor’s program output (final output) connector. The pressed button
lights in red to indicate that the signal assigned to the button is being output
to the program video.
In the background B row, select the B bus video.
For this example, press the 3rd button from the left to select the lion video
signal.
The pressed button lights in amber to indicate that the signal assigned to the
button has only been selected. It is not yet being output to the program
video.
3
4
5
In the M/E transition control block, press the [BKGD] next transition
selection button, lighting it. (Skip this step if the button is already lit.)
The background video is selected as the target of the transition.
In the M/E transition control block, press the [EFF] transition type selection
button, lighting it. (Skip this step if the button is already lit.)
An effect is selected as the transition type.
Select the effect pattern (number 0024).
There are three ways to select effect patterns. In this example, we will use
the Flexi Pad control block.
1) Press the [M/E] button in the Flexi Pad control block, lighting it.
2) Press the [EFF/WIPE] button in the Flexi Pad control block, lighting it.
3) Press the [PTN NO.] button, lighting it in green.
4) With the numeric buttons, enter the digits 2,4, in that order.
The number that you entered appears in the numeric display.
5) Press the [ENTR] button.
Pattern number 0024 is selected.
6
Slowly move the fader lever down from the top position.
A wipe transition using pattern number 0024 begins. A circle showing part
of the video of the B bus (the lion) appears at the center of the A bus video
(the landscape). The circle gradually grows larger, increasing the area
occupied by the B bus video. While this is happening, the transition
indicator LEDs to the left of the fader lever begin to light, starting from the
top. The number of lit LEDs increases as the transition progresses.
At this point, notice how the buttons in the background A row and the
background B row are lit. The button in the A row remains lit in red, but the
color of the lit button in the B row has changed from amber to red. This
indicates that both of the video signals selected by the buttons are being
output to the program video.
7
Stop the fader lever at the bottom position.
The landscape video vanishes from the screen, leaving only the lion video.
This completes the wipe transition.
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on the M/E Bank
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Now, notice again how the buttons in the background A and B rows are lit.
With the transition complete, the 3rd button from the left in the A row is lit
in red, and the 2nd button from the left in the B row is lit in amber. This
means that the signal selections in the A and B rows have been exchanged.
In other words, the lion video is now selected in the A row, and the
landscape video is selected in the B row.
In this state, try moving the fader lever from the bottom to the top. The
transition takes place in the same direction as last time (from A bus video to
B bus video), but this time the lion is replaced by the landscape.
About auto transitions
An auto transition is executed if, in step 6, you press the [AUTO TRANS]
button in the transition execution control block instead of moving the fader
lever.
The time from the start to the end of the transition is called the “transition rate”
(unit: frames). The transition rate can be freely set in the range from 0 to 999
frames.
specify transition rates.
About cut transitions
A cut transition is executed if, in step 6, you press the [CUT] button in the
transition execution control block instead of moving the fader lever. In this case,
the transition type selected in step 4 (effect) and the effect pattern selected in
step 5 (0024) are ignored.
46
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on the M/E Bank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations (2): Video Switching on the PGM/
PST Bank — For 1.5 M/E Systems
If you are using a 1.5 M/E panel or a 1.5 M/E wide panel, you can create the
program video (final output video) on the PGM/PST bank. You can select
background video and execute transitions with the same operations as the ones
used on the M/E bank. You can also take video created on the M/E bank and use
it as background video.
This section shows how to take the output of the M/E bank (for example, the lion
video selected with the 3rd cross-point button from the left) and use it as
background video. To replace it, we will use the castle video selected with the
4th cross-point button from the left. As the wipe pattern, we will use pattern
number 0001, in which the new video gradually moves in from the left side of
the screen.
Transition start
Transition end
Preparations for operation
Before starting, move the fader lever in the PGM/PST transition control block
from one end of its range to the other, and stop it at the top position.
After finishing the above preparations, proceed as follows.
1
2
3
5
4
1.5 M/E panel
Basic Operations (2): Video Switching on the PGM/PST Bank — For 1.5 M/E Systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
1
In the PGM row of the PGM/PST cross-point control block, press the [M/
E] button at the right edge.
The [M/E] button lights in red, and the output video of the M/E bank (the
lion) is selected as the PGM bus video. At this stage, the 3rd button from the
left in the background A row on the M/E cross-point control block also
lights in red.
2
3
In the PST row, press the 4th button from the left.
The button lights in amber, and the castle video is selected as PST bus video.
In the PGM/PST transition control block, press the [WIPE] transition type
selection button, lighting it.
Wipe is selected as the transition type.
4
Select pattern number 0001.
When you use the Flexi Pad control block, procced as follows.
1) Press the [PP/ALL] button, lighting it.
2) Press the [EFF/WIPE] button, lighting it.
3) Press the [PTN NO.] button, lighting it in green.
4) With the numeric buttons, enter the digit 1.
The number that you entered appears in the numeric display.
5) Press the [ENTR] button.
Pattern number 0001 is selected.
5
In the PGM/PST transition control block, slowly move the fader lever
down. Or, press the [AUTO TRANS] button.
The wipe transition starts. On the program monitor screen, the video of the
castle gradually moves in from the left of the video of the lion. When the
transition completes, the lion video is gone and the castle video occupies the
entire screen.
At this stage, the colors of the lit cross-point buttons are as follows.
• 4th button from the left in the PGM row (selecting the castle video
signal): Red
• [M/E] button at the right edge of the PST row (selecting the M/E output
signal): Amber
• 3rd button from the left in the background A row on the M/E cross-point
control block: Amber
48
Basic Operations (2): Video Switching on the PGM/PST Bank — For 1.5 M/E Systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
Chapter
Selecting Video
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Select video (page 49)
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
Selecting Video
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Video in the M/E Cross-Point Control Block
To execute a background video transition, you need to prepare by selecting the
background video before and after the transition on the M/E cross-point control
block.
When using the 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel
Program video (final output video) is created with the background video
selected on the PGM/PST cross-point control block.
See the next section “Selecting Video in the PGM/PST Cross-Point Control
Block” for more information about how to select video on the PGM/PST cross-
point control block.
Select the background video displayed before the transition with the buttons in
the background A row. Select the background video displayed after the
transition with the buttons in the background B row.
The following table shows the correspondences between selectable signals and
the cross-point buttons used to select them in the factory default configuration.
Selectable signal
Cross-point button used to select
signal
Internally generated black signal
BLACK (left edge)
Internally generated color matte signal COLOR BKGD (right edge)
Signals input to processor IN1 to IN8
connectors
Cross-point buttons other than the above
a)
a) IN1 to IN16 when using the 1.5 M/E wide panel.
Assignments of signals to cross-point buttons can be freely changed using the
To select video, proceed as follows.
1
2
1 2
1.5 M/E panel
1 M/E panel
1
Press a button in the background A row to select the background video
before the transition.
50
Selecting Video
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the button pressed to select background video is lit in red, the video
is displayed on the video monitor connected to the processor's program
(final video) output connector.
2
Press a button in the background B row to select the background video after
the transition.
The button lights in amber.
Selecting Video in the PGM/PST Cross-Point Control Block
Select the background video before the transition by pressing a button in the
PGM row. Select the background video after the transition by pressing a button
in the PST row. Except for the [M/E] buttons at the right edge of the rows, the
buttons have the same names and select the same signals as the buttons in the
M/E cross-point control block.
To import video created in the M/E bank as background video into
the PGM/PST bank
Press the [M/E] button at the right edge of either row (PGM row or PST row).
Selecting Video in the AUX Bus Control Block
In the AUX bus control block, you can use the AUX delegation buttons to assign
the cross-point button row to the desired bus, allowing you to select key signals
and signals to apply a variety of other functions.
The buses which can be selected by the AUX delegation buttons are as follows.
Button
Selectable bus
AUX1 to 4 AUX1 bus to AUX4 bus
EDIT PVW Edit Pvw (edit preview) bus
UTIL
Utility bus
KEY1
[SRC BUS] button off: Key1 bus
[SRC BUS] button on: Key1 Source bus
KEY2
DSK1
DSK2
[SRC BUS] button off: Key2 bus
[SRC BUS] button on: Key2 Source bus
[SRC BUS] button off: DSK1 (downstream key 1) bus
[SRC BUS] button on: DSK1 Source (downstream key 1 source) bus
[SRC BUS] button off: DSK2 (downstream key 2) bus
[SRC BUS] button on: DSK2 Source (downstream key 2 source) bus
CCR1,
CCR2
CCR1 (color correction1) bus, CCR2 bus
FRAME
MEM
[SRC BUS] button off: Frame Memory Video bus
[SRC BUS] button on: Frame Memory Key bus
For more information about the buttons in the AUX bus control block, see “AUX
To select signals in the AUX bus control block, proceed as follows.
Selecting Video
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 2
1 2
1.5 M/E panel
1 M/E panel
1
2
Press one of the AUX delegation buttons to select the bus to which the
cross-point button row is assigned.
Press one of the buttons in cross-point button row to select the desired
signal.
When a signal on the selected bus is being output to program video, the
corresponding button lights in red (high tally). Otherwise the button lights
in amber (low tally).
To select the background of a 2-channel effect
In some of the effect patterns from number 2001 to number 2999, utility bus
signals are used as the background for the A bus and B bus video.
For such effect patterns, first press the AUX delegation button [UTIL] and then
press a button in the cross-point button row to select the signal to input to the
utility bus.
52
Selecting Video
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Transition Types
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
Select video (page 49)
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
Selecting Transition Types
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Transition Type and the Next Transition
Next transition
selection buttons
Next transition selection buttons
Transition type selection buttons
Transition type selection
buttons (for M/E bank)
Transition type selection buttons
(for PGM/PST bank)
1.5 M/E panel
1 M/E panel
To select the transition type
Press one of the transition type selection buttons in the M/E transition control
block or the PGM/PST transition control block, lighting the button.
MIX: The new video overlaps the current video, finally replacing it.
EFF: A transition using an effect pattern is executed.
(In the PGM/PST bank, this button is [WIPE].)
PST COLOR MIX: This is a two-stage mix (dissolve), comprising two
transitions. In the first transition, a color matte (non-patterned color signal)
is gradually mixed into the current video. In the second transition, the new
video is gradually mixed into the color matte.
When this is selected, you can use the following procedure to select the
matte color.
To select a color matte for preset color mix
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Transition.
The Transition menu appears.
54
Selecting Transition Types
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Select the target of the setting.
• Press [M/E Pst Col] to select a color matte for the M/E bank.
• Press [P/P Pst Col] to select a color matte for the PGM/PST bank (1.5M/
E panel only).
A popup window appears, displaying the same 8 colors as a color bar.
3
4
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color.
The popup window closes.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
To select the next transition
Select the part of the video which changes in the transition.
Press one of the next transition selection buttons in the M/E transition control
block, lighting the button.
(This operation is not needed for a transition in the PGM/PST bank, since only
the background changes.)
BKGD: The background changes.
KEY1: Insert or delete key 1.
KEY2: Insert or delete key 2.
KEY PRIOR: Reverse the priority of key 1 and key 2.
working with keys.
Note
possible to make multiple next transition selections. Also the [KEY PRIOR]
button cannot be selected.
Selecting Transition Types
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Effects
[WIPE] (in the PGM/PST bank of the 1.5M/E panel), select the effect to use.
Effects selectable in the PGM/PST bank are limited to basic wipes. The M/E
bank can select basic wipes and other effects as well. This section refers to all
of these together as simply “effects.”
For more information about effects, see “Effect Types” (page 60).
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
Select video (page 49)
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
You can select effects using either the Flexi Pad control block or menus.
56
Selecting Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Effects With the Flexi Pad Control Block
2
1
4
2
1
4
3
5
3
5
1.5 M/E panel
1 M/E panel
1
Press the [EFF/WIPE] button in the Flexi Pad control block.
7
4
8
5
2
9
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
6
3
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
1
STORE
MCRO
PTN
NO.
10
ENTR
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
2
3
Select the setting target with the delegation buttons.
• To set the M/E bank, press the [M/E] button.
• To set the PGM/PST bank, press the [PP/ALL] button (when using a 1.5
M/E panel).
Press the [PTN NO.] button, lighting it in green.
(The [PTN NO.] button lights alternately in green and orange each time it is
pressed.)
An effect number can be entered now.
4
Enter the number of the desired effect pattern.
If the number begins by 0, 00, or 000, it is needless to input these zeros. For
example, when the number is 0001, input the digit 1 only.
Wipe pratterns selectable in the PGM/PST bank are limited to 0001 to 0024,
0901, and 0902.
Selecting Effects
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to “Effect Pattern List” in the Appendix (separate document) for more
information about effect patterns.
The entered effect pattern number appears in the numeric display.
Note
Effects numbered 1001 and higher cannot be used when:
• Multiple next transition selections have been made.
• Key priority (KEY PRIOR) has been selected as the transition type.
To re-enter the pattern number
Press the [PTN NO.] button so that it changes back to lit in orange, then
repeat the procedure from step 3.
5
Press the [ENTR] button.
This confirms the effect pattern number entered in step 4.
When an invalid pattern number is entered
A warning tone sounds and the system exits pattern number input mode.
Check the correct pattern number and repeat from step 3.
Selecting Effects From Menus
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main.
The Main menu appears.
(The example in the above figure shows effect pattern 0002 selected. See
page 61 for an example of the screen when a pattern numbered 1001 or
higher is selected.)
2
Press [Pattern].
A popup window appears.
58
Selecting Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To scroll the popup window
Do one of the following.
• Use the scroll bar on the right.
• Rotate knob 1. Each rotation scrolls 1 line up or down.
• Press [Page Down] or [Page Up]. Each press scrolls 3 lines up or down.
3
To select the desired pattern from a group of patterns, press [Group Select].
A popup window appears.
4
Select the name of the desired group.
The effect patterns in the selected group appear.
(The example in the following figure shows the Enhanced group.)
Selecting Effects
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Press the button for the desired pattern.
The effect pattern is confirmed, the popup window closes, and you are
returned to the Main menu.
Effect Types
About effect pattern numbers
The effects available on this system can be selected with 4-digit effect pattern
numbers. These numbers can generally be classified as shown below. In general
this manual calls all effects simply as “effects,” but when it refers to effects used
on the PGM/PST bank, it calls them as “wipes.”
Yes: Available for use No: Not available for use
Type
Effect
pattern
numbers
M/E
PGM/PST
Wipes
0001 to 0661 Yes
Standard group patterns
only (0001 to 0024)
NAM
0901
0902
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Super mix
a)
a)
Effects using 1-channel effects 1001 to 1999
DME
Yes
Yes
2-channel effects 2001 to 2999
No
a) DME option must be installed.
Note
Effects numbered 1001 and higher cannot be used when:
• Multiple next transition selections have been made.
• Key priority ([KEY PRIOR]) has been selected as the transition type.
Transition effects and non-transition effects
Effects numbered 1001 and higher fall into the following two types, depending
on what occurs when the effect is executed.
Transition effects (slides, page turn, etc.): A bus and B bus cross-points are
switched by executing a transition. Also, when border, cropping, or other
1)
modifications have been added, they disappear as soon as the transition
ends.
1) Modifications listed in “Effect Pattern Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
60
Selecting Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
When you add a shadow or trail to an effect applied to a key and then execute
the transition, the shadow or trail disappears instantly as soon as the
transition ends.
Non-transition effects (picture-in-picture, etc.): A bus and B bus cross-points
are not switched, even after the effect ends. Also, when border, cropping, or
1)
other modifications have been added, they do not disappear, even after the
transition ends.
1) Modifications listed in “Effect Pattern Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Selecting Channels
When an effect pattern numbered 2001 or higher is selected, you need to select
the operating channels.
To select channels with the Effect/Wipe control block
Press the [M/E 1CH] or [M/E 2CH] delegation selection button in the Effect/
Wipe control block, lighting the button. You can also select both channels.
To select channels from menus
Note
Two channels cannot be selected at once from a menu.
However, when two channels are selected with the buttons in the Effect/Wipe
control block, both of the buttons are lit in the menu.
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main.
The Main menu appears.
2
Press [M/E 1ch] or [M/E 2ch] to select a channel.
If two channels are selected with the delegation selection buttons in the
effect/wipe control block of the control panel, the parameter setting values
for the reference channel are shown in the menu. Settings for the two
channels are adjusted with relative values.
Setting the parameters of 2-channel effects
Parameters which can be set individually for each channel
• Size and position of the effect pattern (Position), and border color of the effect
pattern (Border Color)
• Brightness of beveled edges (Light mode), direction of light source (Light
mode/Color mode), color (Color mode), softness of edges (Edge Soft)
• Adjustment of crop picture frame (Crop)
Selecting Effects
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
Among the parameters listed above, the following parameters are exceptions.
For the indicated effects, they are set for both channels.
• Position of the Ripple (2ch) effect
• Crop of the Page Roll (2ch) effect
• Crop of the Page Turn (2ch) effect
Parameters common to both channels
Parameters other than the above are set for both channel 1 and channel 2, even
if only one of the channels has been selected with the [M/E 1CH] and [M/E
2CH] delegation selection buttons.
62
Selecting Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Position and Size of Effect Patterns
You can change the position of effect patterns (see following figure) and change
their size.
Position: Off
Position: On
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
Select video (page 49)
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
Changing the Position and Size of Effect Patterns
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Pattern Position and Size With the Joystick
CTR button
1
2
CTR button
1
2
1 M/E panel
1.5 M/E panel
1
2
Press the [POS] button in the Effect/Wipe control block, lighting it.
The joystick is assigned to the positioner (which changes effect pattern
position and size).
For a 2-channel effect, select the channel or channels for which you want to
(You can set the parameters for the individual channels.)
3
Operate the joystick as shown below, depending on what you want to
change.
Joystick direction
X (H Position)
Description
Setting values
Horizontal position
Vertical position
Effect pattern size
–200.00 to +200.00
–200.00 to +200.00
0.00 to 200.00
Y (V Position)
a)
Knob (Size)
a) Not available for some patterns. For details, refer to “Effect Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix (separate document).
To return the pattern size and position to their default
Press the [CTR] button in the Effect/Wipe control block.
Changing Pattern Size and Position From Menus
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main.
The Main menu appears.
64
Changing the Position and Size of Effect Patterns
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Press [Position], turning it on.
For a 2-channel effect, select the channel or channels for which you want to
(You can set the parameters for the individual channels.)
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
4
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
b)
1 (H Position)
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00
2 (V Position)
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00
0.00 to 200.00
c)
Effect pattern size
3 (Size)
a) –100.00 moves the center of the pattern to the left edge, and +100.00 moves it to the right edge.
b) –100.00 moves the center of the pattern to the bottom edge, and +100.00 moves it to the top edge.
c) Not available for some patterns. For details, refer to “Effect Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix (separate document).
To return the pattern to the center of the screen in a transition
(effect pattern nos. 0001 to 0999 only)
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu, press [Auto Center], turning it on.
Changing the Position and Size of Effect Patterns
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Video Borders
You can add borders to the edges of the video, and soften the borders or edges
(see following figure).
s
Border: On
Soft: On
Border: On
Soft: Off
Border: Off
Soft: On
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Select video (page 49)
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
66
Modifying Video Borders
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Borders to Video
SOFT button
2
1
SOFT button
2
1
1 M/E panel
1.5 M/E panel
1
2
Press the [BORD] button in the Effect/Wipe control block, lighting it.
Or, turn [Border] on in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu (see page
58).
Set the following parameter with knob 1.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Width)
Width of border
0.00 to 100.00
To set border colors
1
2
For a 2-channel effect, in the Effect >Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu (see
page 61), select the channel or channels for which you want to make
settings.
(You can set parameters for the individual channels.)
Note that for effects other than 2-channel effects, it is not necessary to carry
out channel selection. Begin with step 2.
Press [Border Color].
A popup window appears, displaying the same 8 colors as a color bar.
3
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color.
Modifying Video Borders
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The popup window closes.
4
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
Softening Video Edges (Soft Edge/Soft Border)
1
2
Press the [SOFT] button in the Effect/Wipe control block, lighting it.
Or, turn [Soft] on in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
No borders:
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Soft)
Softness of edges
0.00 to 100.00
Borders:
Knob
Description
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
1 (Width)
2 (Inner Soft)
Width of borders
Softness of border inner side
a)
3 (Outer Soft) Softness of border outer side
0.00 to 100.00
a) Not displayed for effect patterns nos.1001 to 2999.
68
Modifying Video Borders
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparing Transitions
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Select video (page 49)
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
Setting Transition Rates
For a transition which is executed automatically over a specified duration, you
need to set the duration (transition rate).
To set transition rates, you can use either the Flexi Pad control block or menus.
Preparing Transitions
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set transition rates with the Flexi Pad control block
2
3,4
2
3,4
Transition rate display
Transition rate display
1.5 M/E panel
1
1
1 M/E panel
1
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [TRANS RATE] mode selection
button, lighting it.
The Flexi Pad control block enters transition rate input mode.
Select the target of the setting with the delegation selection buttons.
• Press [M/E] to set for the M/E bank.
• Press [PP/ALL] to set for the PGM/PST bank (when using the 1.5M/E
panel).
3
4
Enter the transition rate as a number of frames. (The setting range is 0 to
999.)
Press the [ENTR] button.
This confirms the input. The transition rate appears beneath the fader lever
in the transition control block.
To set transition rates from menus
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Transition.
The Transition menu appears.
70
Preparing Transitions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Select the target of the setting.
• Press [M/E] to set for the M/E bank.
• Press [P/P] to set for the PGM/PST bank (when using the 1.5M/E panel).
The numeric keypad window appears.
Enter a number of frames in the range 0 to 999 and press [Enter].
This confirms the input. The transition rate appears beneath the fader lever
in the transition control block.
Selecting Effect Directions
You can select the direction of some effects.
The normal direction is the direction of the arrows shown in the illustrations of
effect patterns in the “Effect Pattern List” in the Appendix (separate document).
The reverse direction is the opposite direction.
s
Reverse direction
Normal direction
To select effect directions, you can use either the Effect/Wipe control block or
menus.
Preparing Transitions
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select effect directions with the Effect/Wipe control block
N/R button
REV button
N/R button
REV button
1 M/E panel
1.5 M/E panel
To select the normal direction: Turn both the [REV] button and [N/R] button
off, so that they are not lit.
To select the reverse direction: Press the [REV] button so that it lights, and the
[N/R] button so that it is not lit.
To select the normal/reverse direction: Press the [N/R] button so that it lights .
To select effect directions from menus
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main.
The Main menu appears.
2
Select one of the following.
To select the normal direction: Turn both [Norm/Rev] and [Reverse] off.
To select the reverse direction: Turn [Reverse] on, and turn [Norm/Rev]
off.
To select the normal/reverse direction: Turn [Norm/Rev] on.
72
Preparing Transitions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Executing Transitions
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
Select video (page 49)
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
Executing Transitions
Execute transition with the buttons and levers shown in the following figure.
Executing Transitions
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fader lever
AUTO TRANS button
CUT button
Fader lever
CUT button
Fader lever
CUT button
AUTO TRANS button
AUTO TRANS button
1 M/E panel
1.5 M/E panel
Note
When modifications (Position, Aspect, and so on) have been applied to effects,
the video may not switch smoothly, and afterimages may remain visible even
after transitions have finished executing.
To switch the video instantly ([CUT] button)
Press the [CUT] button in the transition execution section.
The video switches between the A bus and the B bus with each press of the
button.
To execute a transition at a specified transition rate ([AUTO TRANS] button)
Press the [AUTO TRANS] button in the transition execution section.
The progress of the transition is shown by the transition indicator LEDs, which
light one after the other as the transition proceeds.
To execute a transition with the fader lever
Move the transition lever from one side to the other at any speed. Once you do
this, you can control the transition manually.
The transition indicator LEDs light one after the other as you move the lever to
execute the transition.
About fader lever non-sync
If an auto transition finishes with the fader lever in an intermediate position, the
lever position does not match the current transition position. This state is called
“non-sync.”
Two of the transition indicator LEDs light to indicate a non-sync state, either at
the top of the lever range, at the bottom of the range, or at both sides.
74
Executing Transitions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Moving the lever toward the side where LEDs are lit does not execute a
transition. However, the non-sync state is released when the lever reaches the
edge of its range, enabling you to execute a transition with the next operation.
• Moving the lever toward the side where LEDs are not lit executes a transition
across the remaining lever range.
An auto transition is possible even if the fader lever is in a non-sync state. When
you press the [AUTO TRANS] button, the transition indicator LEDs light as
always to show the progress of the transition. But when the transition finishes,
two of the LEDs light to indicate the non-sync state.
Executing Transitions
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Composing Video With Keys
A key is an effect in which color and shape information is used to cut out part
of the background video and replace it with another color or other video. The
signal determining how the background is cut out is termed the “key source,”
and the signal that replaces the cut-out part is termed the “key fill.”
This system supports the following types of keys.
Luminance key/linear key: Used to insert titles and logos into the video. The
key source often shows black and white text, which is detected by using the
luminance (Y) signal.
Chroma key: Used to compose scenes with two different components, for
example people and a background. A key signal based on a particular color
is used to cut out the background.
Pattern key: Video is composed using various patterns. A special pattern is
used as the key source.
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
Select video (page 49)
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
76
Composing Video With Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M/E Keys and Downstream Keys
Two keys each are available on the M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank. The M/
E bank keys are called key 1 and key 2, and the PGM/PST bank keys are called
downstream key 1 and downstream key 2.
The downstream keys are also abbreviated as DSK1 and DSK2.
Inserting Text With a Luminance Key or Linear Key
Key 1 or downstream key 1 (DSK1)
Transition
Key 2 or downstream key 2 (DSK2)
A linear key is a type of luminance key, but with less variation in gain, allowing
more precise adjustment.
The following procedure shows how to set up key 1 on the M/E bank. The same
operations can be used with the other keys as well (key 2, and downstream keys
1 and 2).
To select luminance or linear key and set the key parameters
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Main.
The Main menu appears.
2
Press [Key Type].
A popup window appears.
Composing Video With Keys
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
To select a luminance key, press [Luminance]. To select a linear key, press
[Linear].
The popup window closes.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Clip)
Reference level for key signal generation +109.59 to –7.31
2 (Gain)
3 (Density)
4 (Filter)
Gain of key
–100.00 to +100.00
0.00 to 100.00
Density of key
Filter coefficient
a)
1 to 9
a) Set to 1 for through processing, with no filter applied. The filter becomes stronger as larger
numbers are specified.
To select a key source
1
A popup window appears.
2
3
Press one of the following to select the signal to be used as key source.
Self: Select the same signal as key fill.
Auto Select: Automatically select the key signal assigned to a cross-point
button together with the key fill bus signal as a pair. (Use the Video/Key
Split: Aside from the key source signal selected automatically in Auto
Select mode, another key source may be selected independently. If you
select this, proceed to step 3 and select the key source.
If you selected “Split” in step 2, press the [KEY1] button and the [SRC
BUS] button in the AUX bus control block, lighting both buttons, and select
a key source in the cross-point button row. The state of the [KEY] button
determines whether the key side or the video side is selected. (See the
following figure.)
• When you light the [SRC BUS] button, the [KEY] button also lights,
enabling you to select the key side signal assigned as the key source to the
pair number.
• Pressing the [KEY] button to turn it off enables you to select the video
side signal assigned as the key source to the pair number.
78
Composing Video With Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEY1 button
SRC BUS button (lit)
KEY button
KEY1 button
SRC BUS button (lit)
KEY button
Cross-point button row
Cross-point button row
1.5 M/E panel
1 M/E panel
To select a key fill
1
A popup window appears.
2
3
Press one of the following.
Key Bus: Key fill bus signal selected in the AUX bus control block.
Matte: Signal generated by internal color matte signal generator. When this
is selected, you can select the matte color as explained in the next
section “To adjust the key fill color.”
If you selected “Key Bus” in step 2, first press the [KEY1] button in the
AUX bus control block, lighting it, then press the [SRC BUS] button,
extinguishing it, and finally select the key fill from the cross-point button
row. (See the following figure.)
Composing Video With Keys
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEY1 button
SRC BUS button (not lit)
KEY1 button
SRC BUS button (not lit)
Cross-point button row
Cross-point button row
1 M/E panel
1.5 M/E panel
To adjust the key fill color
When you select “Matte” as the key fill, you can obtain the desired color with
the following procedure.
1
A popup window appears, displaying the same eight colors as a color bar.
2
3
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color.
The popup window closes.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
To insert and delete keys
Use transitions to insert keys into background video and to delete keys from
background video.
80
Composing Video With Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information about key transitions, see “To select the next transition”
Composing Video With Chroma Keys
Key source/key fill
Background video
Chroma key video
To select chroma key
The following procedure shows how to set up key 1 on the M/E bank. The same
operations can be used to set up the other keys as well (key 2, and downstream
keys 1 and 2).
1
2
Press [Chroma].
To select a chroma key source
To select a chroma key fill
luminance and linear keys.
Referring to the procedure for luminance and linear keys in “To select a key fill”
(page 79), set the key fill to “Key Bus,” and select the key fill with the cross-
point buttons.
To adjust auto chroma key
1
2
turning it on.
A square frame sample mark appears in the external monitor screen. Also,
the key source is set automatically to “Self.”
Adjust the following parameters so that the chroma key reference color
(typically blue) is seen within the sample mark.
Composing Video With Keys
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
a)
1 (H Position) Move the sample mark horizontally.
2 (V Position) Move the sample mark vertically.
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
3 (Size)
Adjust the size of the sample mark. 1.00 to 100.00
a) The setting range varies depending on the signal format, and screen aspect and size settings.
3
Press [Auto Start].
Auto chroma key is executed on the basis of the color inside the sample
mark, and chroma key video is output to the monitor screen.
[Auto CRK] is turned off automatically.
To adjust chroma key video
1
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Clip)
2 (Gain)
3 (Hue)
Reference level for key signal generation 0.00 to 100.00
Gain of key
Hue
–100.00 to +100.00
359.99 to 0.00
0.00 to 100.00
4 (Density) Density of key
5 (Filter) Filter coefficient
a)
1 to 9
a) Set to 1 for through processing, with no filter applied. The filter becomes stronger as larger
numbers are specified.
To make finer adjustments, see “Adjusting Chroma Keys” (page 106).
Composing Video With Pattern Keys
To select pattern key and set the key parameters
The following procedure shows how to set up key1 on the M/E bank. The same
operations can be used to set up the other keys as well (key 2, and downstream
keys 1 and 2).
1
2
3
Press [Pattern].
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
1 (Size)
2 (Soft)
Size of pattern
Softness of edges
Density of key
Pattern number
3 (Density)
4 (Pattern)
a)
1 to 24
a) Same as standard wipes.
82
Composing Video With Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the pattern key source
In the pattern key, a wipe pattern is selected automatically as the key source. No
user operation is required.
To select the key fill for a pattern key
As the key fill, “Key Bus” and “Matte” can be selected. (See “To select a key
To transform the pattern used in a pattern key
Adding Borders to Keys
Normal
Border
Drop border
Drop shadow
Outline
The following procedure shows how to add borders to key1 on the M/E bank.
The same operations can be used to add borders to the other keys as well (key
2, and downstream keys 1 and 2).
1
A popup window appears.
2
Press one of the following.
Normal: Do not add anything to the edges.
Border: Add a border to the edges.
Drop Border: Add a drop border to the edges.
Shadow: Add a shadow to the edges.
Outline: Add an outline to the edges.
Composing Video With Keys
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The popup window closes.
3
Set the following parameters, depending on what you selected in step 2.
When Border or Outline was selected (with the separate edge function
(see page 105) being off):
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
b)
1 (Width)
Width
0 to 8 (0.00 to 100.00)
2 (Density)
Density
0.00 to 100.00
b) When pattern key is selected as the key type.
When Border or Outline was selected (with the separate edge function
(see page 105) being on):
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Left)
Left edge position
0 to 8
a)
2 (Right)
3 (Top)
Right edge position
Top edge position
0 to 8
a)
0 to 8
a)
4 (Bottom)
Bottom edge
position
0 to 8
5 (Density)
Key density
0.00 to 100.00
When Drop Border or Shadow was selected:
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Width)
Width
0 to 8
b)
2 (Position)
3 (Density)
Position
Density
1 to 3
0.00 to 100.00
To add color to the key edges
1
2
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Main, and press [Edge Color].
A popup window appears.
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color, and adjust
the parameters with the knobs.
Masking Part of a Key
A mask is used to cover part of the video with background or a key. This allows
you to correct for unwanted holes in the background or a key that is not cut out
in the desired way.
84
Composing Video With Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key mask
Background mask
Masked area
(box)
1
2
A popup window appears.
Press one of the following.
Off: Do not mask.
Key Mask: This masks out a part of the key, which will result in the
background appearing.
Bkgd Mask: This masks out a part of the background, which will result in
the key fill appearing.
The popup window closes.
To make detailed mask settings, see “Setting Key Mask Shapes and
Moving a Key Over or Under
To check whether a key is over or under
There are OVER indicators in the M/E transition control block, located over
key1 and key2. The key whose OVER indicator is lit is the key on top.
To move a key over or under from menus
The following procedure shows how to move key1 on the M/E bank. The same
operations can be used to move the other keys as well (key 2, and downstream
keys 1 and 2).
1
A popup window appears.
Composing Video With Keys
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Press one of the following.
Over: The target key is moved to over.
Under: The target key is moved to under.
To move keys over and under in a transition
There is a [KEY PRIOR] button in the M/E transition control block.
The over/under relationship of key 1 and key 2 is reversed.
Inserting and Deleting Keys Only
To insert or delete a key by mixing (independent key transition)
1,2
1,2
1
1
3
3
1.5 M/E panel
1 M/E panel
The following procedure shows how to set up downstream key 1. The same
operations can be used to set up the other keys as well (M/E keys 1 and 2, and
downstream key 2).
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Transition.
2
3
After pressing [DSK1], enter the key's transition rate in the numeric keypad
In the downstream key/fade to black control block, press the [AUTO
TRANS] button for DSK1.
Downstream key 1 is inserted, mixing into the background. If downstream
key 1 is already inserted, it is deleted.
To insert or delete keys instantly
To insert or delete downstream keys instantly
In the downstream key/fade to black control block, press the [DSK1 ON] button
or the [DSK2 ON] button.
86
Composing Video With Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert or delete M/E keys instantly
If you are using the 1.5M/E panel, press the [KEY1 ON] button or the [KEY2
ON] button in the M/E key transition control block.
If you are using the 1 M/E panel, press the [KEY1 ON] button or the [KEY2
ON] button in the M/E transition control block.
Composing Video With Keys
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internally Generated Signals
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Select video (page 49)
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
Using a Color Background
The term “color background” refers to a signal generated by the processor’s
internal color generator. The color can be either monotone or composed from
two colors.
88
Using Internally Generated Signals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color background (single-color)
To set color 1
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd.
The Color Bkgd menu appears.
The [Color1] button shows the current color.
2
Press [Color1].
A popup window appears.
3
4
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
To compose a pattern of two colors (color mix)
Color 1
Color 2
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Mix Color],
turning it on.
Using Internally Generated Signals
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Compose the pattern by using the knobs to set the following parameters.
Knob
Description
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
1 (Size)
2 (Soft)
3 (Pattern)
Size of pattern
Softness of edges
Pattern number
a)
1 to 24
a) Same as patterns in the standard group.
3
4
Press [Color1]. In the popup window which appears, press the button for the
color that is closest to the desired color. Then set the parameters with the
Press [Color2] and repeat the procedure.
To transform color mix patterns
To set the pattern position
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Position], turning
it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
a)
1 (H Position)
Move the pattern horizontally
–200.00 to +200.00
–200.00 to +200.00
2 (V Position)
Move the pattern vertically
a) Minus values move the pattern to the left, and plus values move it to the right. At –100.00 the
horizontal center is at the left edge of the screen. At +100.00, it is at the right edge.
b) Minus values move the pattern down, and plus values move it up. At –100.00 the vertical center
is at the bottom edge of the screen. At +100.00, it is at the top edge.
To arrange multiple examples of the same pattern
1
2
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Multi], turning it
on.
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (H Multi)
Number of patterns arranged
horizontally
1 to 63
2 (V Multi)
Number of patterns arranged
vertically
1 to 63
3 (Invert Type) How patterns are arranged
1 to 4 (see figure below)
90
Using Internally Generated Signals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the aspect ratio of a pattern
1
2
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Aspect], turning
it on.
Set the following parameter with knob 1.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Aspect)
Aspect ratio of pattern
–100.00 to +100.00
a) Minus values make the pattern taller, and plus values make the pattern longer.
To rotate an effect pattern
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Rotation].
A popup window appears.
2
3
Press [Angle].
Set the following parameter with knob 1.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Angle)
Angle of pattern slant
–100.00 to +100.00
a) –100.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is one rotation in the
clockwise direction.
To rotate an effect pattern at a specified speed
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Rotation].
A popup window appears.
2
3
Press [Speed].
Set the following parameter with knob 1.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Speed)
Speed of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00
a) –100.00 is one rotation per second in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is one rotation
per second in the clockwise direction.
To modulate an effect pattern
Note
The shape of the modulation wave is fixed as a sin wave.
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [H Modulation] or
[V Modulation], turning it on.
Using Internally Generated Signals
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H Modulation gives horizontal modulation, and V Modulation gives
vertical modulation.
2
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
1 (Amplitude)
2 (Frequency)
3 (Speed)
Amplitude of modulation wave
Frequency of modulation wave
Speed of modulation
a)
–100.00 to +100.00
a) In H Modulation, maximum speed is at –100.00 in the left direction and +100.00 in the right
direction.
In V Modulation, maximum speed is at –100.00 in the downward direction and +100.00 in the
upward direction.
To exchange color 1 and color 2
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Color Invert], turning
it on.
The data for color 1 and color 2 are exchanged.
92
Using Internally Generated Signals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fading the Video to Black
Fade to black gradually darkens the overall video image, until it is completely
black.
Flow of Operations
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).
Basic operations
Advanced operations
: Always done
: Done as required
Select video (page 49)
: Done at this stage
Select the transition type (page 53)
Select an effect (page 56)
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in
this way. For details, refer to “Effect
Pattern Transformations and
Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Select the operating channels (page 61)
When mix or
preset color mix
is selected
Prepare the transition (page 69)
Advanced key operations (page 104)
Execute the transition (page 73)
Compose video by keying (page 76)
Color correction (page 111)
Frame memory (page 119)
Snapshots (page 124)
Macros (page 127)
Use internally generated signals (page 88)
Safe title (page 134)
Copying (page 135)
Fade out to black (page 93)
Fading the Video to Black
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1,2
1,2
1
1
3
3
1.5 M/E panel
1 M/E panel
To fade out the video with fade to black
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Transition.
The Transition menu appears.
2
3
After pressing [FTB], enter a transition rate in the numeric keypad window.
In the downstream key/fade to black control block, press the [FTB] button.
The [FTB] button lights, and the fade to black begins. When it finishes, the
picture is completely black.
To stop the fade to black and return to the state before it started, press the
button again.
To return to the original video from a black screen
Press the [FTB] button again.
94
Fading the Video to Black
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Chapter
Advanced Effect
Operations
The procedures in this section mainly show how to operate
with M/E effects (effects used on the M/E bank). The same
procedures can also be used with PGM/PST wipes (wipes
used on the PGM/PST bank).
Transforming Effect Patterns
2
3
Press [Aspect], turning it on.
Note that some effect patterns cannot be transformed.
Set the aspect ratio parameter with knob 1.
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Aspect) Aspect ratio of
pattern
–100.00 to +100.00
To change the aspect ratio of an effect
pattern (Aspect)
a) Minus values make the pattern taller, and plus values make the
pattern longer.
To rotate an effect pattern (Rotation)
Aspect: On
Aspect: Off
Rotation (Angle): On
Rotation: Off
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect
>Modify (Ptn 1-999).
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Modify (Ptn No.
0001-0999) menu (see previous section), press
[Rotation].
The Modify (Ptn No.0001-0999) menu appears.
A popup window appears.
Advanced Effect Operations
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Modify (Ptn No.
the following on.
H Modulation: Modulate horizontally.
V Modulation: Modulate vertically.
Set the parameters with the knobs.
2
3
Set the following as required.
Knob
1 (Amplitude) Amplitude of
modulation wave
Description
Setting values
Angle: Slant the pattern at a specified angle.
Speed: Rotate the pattern at a specified speed.
Magnitude: Rotate the pattern to a specified angle
during the transition.
0.00 to 100.00
2 (Frequency) Frequency of
modulation wave
0.00 to 100.00
a)
3 (Speed)
Speed of
modulation
Set the following parameters according to the selection
in step 2.
–100.00 to +100.00
b)
4 (Shape)
Shape of
modulation wave
1 to 3
When Angle was selected:
a) In H Modulation, maximum speed is at –100.00 in the left direction
and +100.00 in the right direction.
In V Modulation, maximum speed is at –100.00 in the downward
direction and +100.00 in the upward direction.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Angle)
Angle of pattern
slant
–100.00 to +100.00
b) 1: Sine wave, 2: Triangular wave, 3: Rectangular wave
a) –100.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and
+100.00 is one rotation in the clockwise direction. 0.00 is no rotation.
To arrange several examples of the same
effect pattern (Multi)
When Speed was selected:
Knob
Description
Setting values
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Modify (Ptn No.
it on.
a)
1 (Speed)
Speed of pattern
rotation
–100.00 to +100.00
a) –100.00 is one rotation per second in the counterclockwise direction,
and +100.00 is one rotation per second in the clockwise direction.
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
When Magnitude was selected:
For an M/E effect:
Knob
Description
Setting values
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
b)
1 (Angle)
Angle of pattern
slant
–100.00 to +100.00
1 (H Multi)
Number of
patterns
arranged
horizontally
1 to 63
2 (Magnitude) Magnitude of
rotation during
–200.00 to +200.00
transition
2 (V Multi)
3 (Shift)
Number of
patterns
arranged
vertically
1 to 63
a) –100.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and
+100.00 is one rotation in the clockwise direction. 0.00 is no rotation.
b) –200.00 is two rotations in the counterclockwise direction, and
+200.00 is two rotations in the clockwise direction. 0.00 is no
rotation.
a)
Amount of
–100.00 to +100.00
horizontal shift of
patterns in even
numbered rows
To modulate effect patterns (H/V
Modulation)
This procedure is supported only for M/E effects.
a) Minus values shift to the left, and plus values shift to the right.
For a PGM/PST wipe:
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (H Multi)
Number of patterns 1 to 63
arranged
horizontally
2 (V Multi)
Number of patterns 1 to 63
arranged vertically
Modulation H: On
Modulation V: On
96
Advanced Effect Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knob
Description
Setting values
3 (Invert Type) Replication layout
1 to 4 (see the
following figure)
Crop: On
Crop: Off
1
Press the [CROP] button in the Effect/Wipe control
block, turning it on.
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Crop menu, turn
[Crop] on.
1: All patterns point in same direction
2: Even numbered rows move in horizontal direction
3: Even numbered columns and rows are inverted
4: Even numbered columns and rows are inverted, and even numbered
rows move in horizontal direction
3
For an M/E effect, do the following to invert the
direction of every other pattern.
• To invert every other pattern in the horizontal
direction, press [H Invert].
• To invert every other pattern in the vertical
direction, press [V Invert].
To mix in a diamond dust effect (Dust Mix)
This procedure is supported only for M/E effects.
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Modify (Ptn No.
turning it on.
2
3
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Left)
Crop left side of
image.
–100.00 to +100.00
1 (Mix Ratio) Ratio of diamond
dust mixed in
0.00 to 100.00
2 (Right)
3 (Top)
Crop right side of
image.
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
2 (H Size)
Horizontal size of
particles
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
Crop top side of
image.
3 (V Size)
Vertical size of
particles
4 (Bottom)
5 (All)
Crop bottom side of –100.00 to +100.00
image.
4 (Flash Rate) Flash rate of
particles
Crop all sides of
image.
Left value shown
Cropping Effects
To crop to 4:3 in 16:9 mode
In HD format 16:9 mode, you can crop the video to 4:3.
To turn the crop function on
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.
It is not supported for some patterns.
1
2
Press the [CROP] button in the Effect/Wipe control
block, turning it on.
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Crop menu, turn
[Crop] on.
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
In the Crop menu, press [4:3 Crop].
Advanced Effect Operations
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set a relationship between transition
progress and cropping
1
2
Carry out the procedure in the previous section “To
In the Crop menu, press [Crop Trans].
A popup window appears.
Beveled edges in light mode Beveled edges in color mode
To add beveled edges to video
Note
Beveled edges are added to both channels of 2-channel
effects. They cannot be added to individual channels.
3
4
Select one of the following, as required.
Cut: Cut mode. The crop is unchanged during the
transition, and is released when the transition
completes.
Last 5%: The crop is unchanged until the transition is
95% complete, and is released during the
remaining 5%.
1
Press the [BVLD EDGE] button in the Effect/Wipe
control block, turning it on.
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Beveled Edge
menu, turn [Beveled Edge] on.
Linear: The cropping is removed linearly through the
whole course of the transition.
If you selected “Last 5%” in step 3, specify the dead
zone of the transition by setting “Release Trans” to on
or off.
Off: The transition completes when 95% of the
specified transition duration has elapsed. The crop
is released at the same time.
On: The last 30% of the specified transition duration
is made a transition dead zone. The crop is
released when 95% of the specified duration has
elapsed.
2
3
Set the following parameter with knob 1.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
Adding Beveled Edges to Video
1 (Width)
Width of beveled
edges
0.00 to 100.00
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.
It is not supported for some patterns.
a) 100 is 1/2 of the full-sized picture.
Press [Edge Mode], turning it on.
A popup window appears.
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Light mode and color mode
You can add beveled edges in light mode or color mode.
Light mode: Beveled edges are produced by varying the
brightness at the edges of the video.
Color mode: Beveled edges are produced by adding color
at the edges of the video.
4
Press [Light] to select light mode, or [Color] to select
98
Advanced Effect Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
Color mode:
Parameter group [1/2]
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Lum 1) Luminance of
edges on side
close to light
0.00 to 100.00
Light mode:
Knob
1 (Inten 1) Luminance of
edges on side close
Description
Setting values
source
a)
0.00 to 200.00
2 (Sat 1)
Saturation of edges 0.00 to 100.00
on side close to
to light source
light source
a)
2 (Inten 2) Luminance of
0.00 to 200.00
a)
Hue of edges
359.99 to 0.00
3 (Hue)
edges on side away
from light source
a)
b)
Direction of light
source
4 (Angle)
–100.00 to +100.00
b)
3 (Angle) Direction of light
source
–100.00 to +100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
a) 0.00 is no luminance component (edges are black). 100.00 is no
addition. 200.00 is twice as bright.
b) 0.00 is light striking from the right side of the picture. –100.00 is one
rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is one
rotation in the clockwise direction.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Lum 2) Luminance of
edges on side away
from light source
0.00 to 100.00
Example: Changing the angle value
Inten 1: 80
Inten 2: 180
2 (Sat 2)
Saturation of edges 0.00 to 100.00
on side away from
light source
Angle
a)
Hue of edges
359.99 to 0.00
3 (Hue)
Intensity 1
a)
b)
Direction of light
source
4 (Angle)
–100.00 to +100.00
1
a) Knobs 3 and 4 are shared by parameter groups 1/2 and 2/2.
b) 0.00 is light striking from the right side of the picture. –100.00 is one
rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is one
rotation in the clockwise direction.
Intensity 2
Intensity 1
2
1
To soften beveled edges
2
Intensity 2
1
2
3
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Beveled Edge menu,
turn [Edge Soft] on.
The edges
corresponding to Inten 1
and Inten 2 change
j
depending on the angle.
Intensity 2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
2
Knob
Description
Setting values
Intensity 2
Intensity 1
1 (Inner)
Softness of inner
side of edges
0.00 to 100.00
2
1
2 (Boundary) Softness of edge
boundaries
0.00 to 100.00
1
Intensity 1
Angle
Inner
Boundary
Advanced Effect Operations
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset light:
Adding Lighting
Knob
Description
Setting values
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.
It is not supported for some patterns.
a)
1 (Width)
Width of light
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00
a)
2 (Soft)
Softness of light
boundaries
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
3 (Intensity) Strength of light
0.00 to 100.00
Preset + shade:
Lighting types
Knob
Description
Setting values
There are three types of lighting. The type of lighting is
fixed in advance for each effect number. It cannot be
selected.
a)
1 (Width)
Width of light
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00
a)
2 (Soft)
Softness of light
boundaries
Plane light: Parallel light rays strike the picture from a
specified direction. You can set the direction. The
brightness of the light varies according to the angle.
Preset light: Light strikes the picture in a form which
varies according to the effect pattern. Brightness is
constant, regardless of the position of the picture.
Preset + shade: Shading is added to the Preset light
described above.
3 (Intensity)
Strength of light
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
b)
c)
4 (Shade Ints) Intensity of light
shadow
5 (Shade Gain) Gain of shadow
color
0.00 to 100.00
a) 100 is the value of the effect pattern width parameter when the effect
pattern was applied.
b) 0 is no lighting. 100 is strong lighting.
c) 0 is black.
To add lighting
To set the light color
Note
Lighting is added to both channels of 2-channel effects. It
cannot be added to nor adjusted for individual channels.
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Lighting menu, press
[Light Color].
1
Press the [LIGHT] button in the Effect/Wipe control
block, turning it on.
A popup window appears.
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect > Lighting menu,
turn [Lighting] on.
2
3
Press a button with a color that is close to the color you
want.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
Adding Afterimages (Trail)
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.
It is not supported for some patterns.
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Parameters vary depending on the type of lighting
used by the selected effect.
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
Plane light:
Knob
Description
Setting values
3 (Intensity) Strength of light
0.00 to 100.00
100
Advanced Effect Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select the image to use in afterimages
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Trail/Shadow menu,
press [Trail Source].
A popup window appears.
Trail
To add afterimages
Notes
2
3
Select one of the following as the image to insert into
afterimages.
• Trails are added to both channels of 2-channel effects.
They cannot be added to nor adjusted for individual
channels.
disabled.
Freeze Video: Freeze images from the input video.
Flat Color: Single-color matte.
Hue Rotate: Single-color mattes, with the hue
changing for each frame.
1
Press the [TRAIL/SHDW] button in the Effect/Wipe
control block, turning it on.
If you selected Flat Color or Hue Rotate in step 2,
adjust the following parameters.
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect > Trail/Shadow
menu, turn [Trail/Shdw] on.
Flat Color:
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
Hue Rotate:
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
0.00 to 100.00
3 (Hue Speed) Speed at which
the hue changes
–100.00 to +100.00
2
3
Press [Type].
A popup window appears.
To set afterimage colors from a menu
When the image in afterimages is Flat Color, you can press
[Flat Color] and set the color from the popup window
which appears.
Select [Trail].
See page 55 for more information about how to set the
color.
To transform afterimages into stardust
The afterimage portion becomes stardust, and gradually
disappears.
4
Set the following parameter with knob 1.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Trail/Shadow menu,
turn [Trail Dust] on.
1 (Decay)
Degree to which the 0.00 to 100.00
trail is left
Advanced Effect Operations
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (H Position) Position in
horizontal
–200.00 to +200.00
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Trail Dust) Amount of the
afterimage
direction
0.00 to 100.00
b)
2 (V Position) Position in
–200.00 to 0.00
disappearing as
stardust
vertical direction
Density of
shadow
3 (Density)
0.00 to 100.00
b)
2 (Dust Soft) Timing with which
stardust disappears
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
a) –200.00 moves left by the horizontal width of the screen, and
+200.00 moves right by the horizontal width of the screen.
b) –200.00 moves down by the vertical size of the screen. 0.00 is
approximately the same position as the image.
3 (Dust Size) Size of stardust
a) 0.00 is no afterimages. 100.00 is no transformation of afterimages
into stardust.
b) Higher values make the stardust disappear more slowly.
To set the shadow color
Adding Shadows Around Effects
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Trail/Shadow menu,
press [Shdw Color].
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.
It is not supported for some patterns.
A popup window appears.
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix
(separate document).
2
3
Press a button for a color that is close to the color you
want.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
To soften the edges of the shadow
Shadow
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Trail/Shadow menu, turn
[Shdw Soft] on.
To add shadows
Composing a Video border Color
From Two Colors
Notes
• Shadows are added to both channels of 2-channel
effects. They cannot be added to nor adjusted for
individual channels.
disabled.
You can compose the color of video borders from any two
colors.
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.
1
101).
About the basic border settings, see “Adding Borders to
2
3
Select [Shadow].
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect
>Border Color.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
The Border Color menu appears.
102
Advanced Effect Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving, Recalling, and Deleting
Effect Snapshots
You can save snapshots of the current effect pattern
numbers, transformation parameters, and so on, and recall
them for later use. These snapshots are called “effect
snapshots.”
There are ten effect snapshot registers (1 to 10) on each of
the M/E and P/P regions. (A region means a functional unit
block of the system.)
Saving effect snapshots
2
Set the pattern used to mix the 2 colors, and specify
color 1 and color 2.
(page 90) for information on how to set the
parameters.
3
2
7
4
8
5
2
9
Note that “Mix Color” is effective only when both of
the following conditions are met.
• In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu,
[Border Fill] is set to “Matte.”
• One of the effect pattern numbers 0001 to 0999 is
selected.
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
6
3
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
1
STORE
MCRO
PTN
NO.
10
ENTR
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
Using Pattern Specific
Transformations
In addition to the transformation described in
also specific transformations which are permitted by some
effect patterns.
An example of one such transformation is provided below.
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern Transition
Parameter List” in the Appendix (separate document).
4
5
1
2
Make the effect settings that you want to save.
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [EFF/WIPE]
button, lighting it.
The Flexi Pad control block enters effect snapshot
mode, and the memory recall buttons take on the
configuration shown above.
Example of a pattern specific
transformation (Matrix)
1
Select one of the effect pattern numbers listed below.
3
Press and light the region selection button for the
region that you want to save.
0200 to 0203, 0206 to 0213, 0224 to 0247, 0250 to
0257, 0260 to 0269.
• To save M/E effect settings, press the [M/E] button.
• To save PGM/PST effect settings, press the [PP/
ALL] button (1.5M/E panel only).
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
4
5
Press the [STORE] button, lighting it.
1 (H Tile No)
Number of tiles in
horizontal direction
2 to 36
The system is now ready to save an effect snapshot.
2 (V Tile No)
Number of tiles in
vertical direction
2 to 18
Press the memory recall button for the register in
which you want to save the effect snapshot.
Advanced Effect Operations
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
Pressing a button which is lit in orange or yellow will
overwrite the current contents of the register.
Advanced Key
Operations
When the save is complete, the button that you pressed
lights in yellow and the number on the button changes
from a register number to an effect pattern figure.
The pattern number appears in the numeric display.
This section explains procedures for setting M/E key 1.
The same procedures can be used for the other keys as well
(M/E key 2, and downstream keys 1 and 2).
Recalling effect snapshots
Processing Key Signals
3
1
To turn key clean mode on
Clean mode
In a luminance key or linear key, you can enable the clean
mode. When the clean mode is on, the key source does not
affect the key fill, which is added unchanged to the
background. This improves the keyed image quality, but
means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be
inserted must be completely black, or it will color the
background.
This mode is effective when using character generators,
which generate paired key source and key fill signals.
Note that in the following situations, the clean mode goes
off, and cannot be turned on.
7
4
8
5
2
9
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
6
3
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
1
STORE
MCRO
PTN
NO.
10
ENTR
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
• When the key type is a pattern key or chroma key
• When key inversion (Key Invert) is on
• When the Key Position function is on
2
4
• When fine key is on
• When the key fill is a matte
• When the key edge is anything other than normal
• When the key edge is normal, and soft edges are on
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [EFF/WIPE]
button, lighting it.
2
3
If the [STORE] button is lit, press it to turn it off.
To turn clean mode on
Press to light the region selection button (M/E or PP/
ALL) for the region of the snapshot that you want to
recall.
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Key
Source.
The Key Source menu appears.
The memory recall buttons show figures of the saved
effect patterns. Buttons where snapshots are already
saved are lit in orange.
4
Press the memory recall button for the effect snapshot
that you want.
When the recall finishes, the pressed button lights in
yellow and the numeric display shows the pattern
number of the corresponding pattern.
Deleting effect snapshots
With the [STORE] button lit, hold the [EFF/WIPE] button
down and press the memory recall button for the effect
snapshot that you want to delete. The button you pressed is
turned off, and the effect snapshot is deleted.
2
Press [Clean Mode], turning it on.
104
Advanced Key Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To invert key signals
Adjusting Key Borders
You can invert the black/white of key signals. This allows
you to use a key source as black characters against a white
background and white characters against a black
background.
information about how to make basic key border settings.
To turn the key inversion function on, in the Key >M/E
Key1 >Key Source menu, press [Key Invert], turning it on.
Applying 2-color borders
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Edge.
The Edge menu appears.
To adjust the key position
For luminance keys, linear keys, and chroma keys, you can
move the edges of the key signal horizontally.
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Key Source menu, press [Key
Position], turning it on.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Left Pos)
Left edge position
–4.00 to +4.00
2 (Right Pos) Right edge position –4.00 to +4.00
3 (H Phase) Horizontal direction Left Pos value
position shown
2
3
Press [Mix Color], turning it on.
To turn the fine key function on
Set the pattern used to mix the 2 colors, and specify
color 1 and color 2.
When the fine key function is on, you can make fine
adjustments to the left, right, top, and bottom edge
positions of the key signal.
(page 90) for information on how to set the
parameters. Note that the parameters H Modulation
and V Modulation are not available for color mix
patterns.
Note
When fine key is on, the width of borders, drop borders,
drop shadows, and outlines is limited to a maximum to 4.
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Key Source menu, press [Fine
Key], turning it on.
To set separate border widths (Separate
Edge function)
When you add borders or outlines to luminance keys,
linear keys, or chroma keys, you can set the widths of the
four borders separately.
Make fine adjustments to key edge positions by setting
the following parameters with the knobs.
Parameter group [1/2]
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Edge menu, press [Sep Edge],
turning it on.
The width of the four borders are now separately
adjustable.
Knob
Description
Setting values
–2.00 to +2.00
–2.00 to +2.00
–2.00 to +2.00
1 (Left Pos)
Left edge position
2 (Right Pos) Right edge position
3 (Top Pos) Top edge position
Setting maximum border widths
4 (Bottom Pos) Bottom edge position –2.00 to +2.00
When you add borders, drop borders, drop shadows, or
outlines to key edges, proceed as follows to set the
maximum width.
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob
Description
Setting values
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Edge menu, press [Delay
Mode], turning it on.
1 (H Phase) Horizontal
position
Left Pos value shown
2 (V Phase) Vertical position Top Pos value shown
A popup window appears.
Press one of the following.
2
Advanced Key Operations
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4H Mode: Set the maximum width to 4 (4 lines). Key
fill and key source drop down by 4 lines.
forcibly cut any parts below this level. This is called the
plane function.
8H Mode: Set the maximum width to 8 (8 lines). Key
fill and key source drop down by 8 lines.
The plane function is enabled when additive mix is
selected.
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press
[Plane], turning it on.
Adjusting Chroma Keys
Proceed as follows to make fine adjustments to the chroma
Set the following parameter with knob 1.
Knob
Description
Setting values
To select the chroma key composition
method
1 (Lum)
Luminance level
0.00 to 100.00
To adjust chroma keys manually
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma
Key.
Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma
keying include automatic adjustment with the auto chroma
key function, and manual adjustment carrying out the
necessary processing separately. The optimum results will
be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto
chroma key function, then making fine adjustments as
required.
The Chroma Key menu appears.
The following manual adjustments are possible.
• Key active
• Color cancel
• Window
• Y balance
• Chroma key shadow
• Video signal adjustment
2
3
Press [Mix Mode].
To make adjustments with key active
When the key active function is on, the composite video is
output and you can adjust the composition method
manually while viewing the monitor.
When the key active function is off, only the foreground is
output. You should turn key active off when making
manual adjustments with color cancel (see the next
section).
A popup window appears.
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, turn [Key
Active] on.
Select one of the following.
Normal Mix: The background is cut out with the key
signal, and then combined with the foreground,
which has also been cut out with the key signal.
Additive Mix: The background, which has been cut
out with the key signal, is combined with the
unshaped foreground. This is effective for a
natural looking composite when the scene
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Clip)
Chroma key
reference level
0.00 to 100.00
2 (Gain)
3 (Hue)
Key gain
Hue
–100.00 to +100.00
359.99 to 0.00
includes glass or other translucent objects.
4 (Density) Key density
5 (Filter) Filter coefficient
0.00 to 100.00
To turn the plane function on
a)
1 to 9
In an additive mix, the foreground is not shaped by the key
signal, and variations in the (blue) background appear in
the composite image. To prevent this, it is possible to set a
particular luminance level for the background, and
a) Set to 1 for through processing, with no filter applied. The filter
becomes stronger as larger numbers are specified
106
Advanced Key Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the color cancel key edge positions
To make adjustments with color cancel
If the foreground image includes shades of the background
color, turn this function on to remove the color from the
foreground image.
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press [CC
Key Pos], turning it on.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, turn [Key
Active] off, and turn [Color Cancel] on.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Left Pos)
Move the left edge of –3.00 to +3.00
the color cancel key.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
2 (Right Pos)
3 (H Phase)
Move the right edge –3.00 to +3.00
of the color cancel
key.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
4 (Filter)
Horizontal position of Left Pos value
the color cancel key. shown
a)
Filter coefficient
1 to 9
Adjusting the ratio of Y balance added to a color
cancel key
a) Set to 1 for through processing, with no filter applied. The filter
becomes stronger as larger numbers are specified
For the Y balance function, see “To adjust the Y balance”
3
Turn [Key Active] on.
The video composed with chroma key reappears on
the monitor.
By using the Y balance function on a color cancel key,
colors of the same hue as the background (typically blue)
can be output in the foreground without being cancelled.
Adjusting the key signal for color cancel
When color cancel is on, you can adjust the key signal for
color cancel.
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press [CC
Y Balance], turning it on.
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press
[Cancel Key], turning it on.
Set the following parameter with the knob.
The color cancel function is turned on.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Mixture) Y balance key ratio 0.00 to 100.00
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
To adjust the window
1 (Clip)
Reference level 0.00 to 100.00
Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a
particular color (reference color) in the foreground
(typically a plain blue background). The “window” refers
to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this
specified reference color to create the key signal.
As seen on a vectorscope, the range for this matching
corresponds to a truncated sector (see the following
figure). This range is specified by two parameters: the
“Angle” parameter, which determines the range of the hue
parameter, and the “Crop” parameter, which determines
the degree of truncation.
of color cancel
key
2 (Gain)
Key gain
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Make the following settings as required.
Adjusting the color cancel key window (range of
matching colors)
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press [CC
Window], turning it on.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Crop)
100.00 to 0.00
Crop value
Angle value
a)
2 (Angle)
180.00 to 0.00
a) See the figure in “To adjust the window.”
Advanced Key Operations
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knob
Description
Key gain
Setting values
–100.00 to +100.00
0.00 to 100.00
2 (Gain)
3 (Lum)
Luminance
Angle a)
To adjust chroma key shadows
Reference color hue
This function provides a more realistic treatment when the
shadow of an object in the field of view falls on the blue
background. Since parts of the blue background darker
than a specified intensity are treated as shadows, there is
no effect on cutting out of the foreground.
Crop a)
Range of colors
remaining as
foreground
Range of colors creating the
key signal (to be replaced by
background signal)
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press
[Shadow], turning it on.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
a) The Crop and Angle values do not change even if you
use the auto chroma key function.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Lum)
Reference
luminance of
shadow
0.00 to 100.00
To adjust the window, the Clip, Gain, Hue must be
adjusted to appropriate values. Set these to appropriate
values first, and then proceed as follows.
2 (Gain)
Gain of shadow
key
–100.00 to +100.00
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press
[Window], turning it on.
3 (Density) Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
4 (Soft)
Softness of
shadow
0.00 to 100.00
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Note
Knob
Description
Setting values
When chroma key shadowing is on, key edges are normal
with soft edges off.
a)
1 (Crop)
100.00 to 0.00
Crop value
Angle value
a)
2 (Angle)
180.00 to 0.00
To adjust video signals
a) See above figure.
You can vary the gain and hue of chroma key foreground
video. Gain can be adjusted for the overall video signal, or
individually for Y and C.
To adjust the Y balance
In normal chroma keying, the key signal is based on the
chrominance component only, and all elements of the
foreground with the same hue are replaced by the
background. Using the Y balance function, you can specify
a luminance level range within which the key is active, and
replace the specified part by the background.
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press
[Frgd V Proc], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.
You can use the Y balance function independently on the
key signal for the composition and the key signal for the
color cancel function. When applied to the key signal for
the composition, this produces the foreground with the
color cancel effect applied. This can therefore be used to
provide an impression of smoke, for example.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Video Gain) Overall gain of
video signal
–100.00 to +100.00
2 (Y Gain)
3 (C Gain)
Gain of Y signal –100.00 to +100.00
Gain of C signal –100.00 to +100.00
4 (Hue Offset) Amount of hue
offset
–180.00 to +180.00
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press [Y
Balance], turning it on.
Set the following parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Clip)
Reference level of 0.00 to 100.00
color cancel key
108
Advanced Key Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transforming the Pattern of a
Pattern Key
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Pattern
Key.
The Pattern Key menu appears.
2
Press [Mask Source].
A popup window appears.
2
Press one of the following buttons, depending on what
you want to adjust.
3
4
Select either of the following.
For details about operation, see the sections on effect
transformations (on the pages indicated in
parentheses).
Box: Box-shaped mask signal
Pattern: Mask signal with the same pattern as a
standard group effect pattern.
Rotation: Rotate the key pattern to a specified angle
not available for pattern keys.
Multi: Arrange several examples of the same key
operate in the same way as in “For a PGM/PST
effect:” in the effect transformation procedure.
Set the following parameters, depending on the mask
type selected in step 3.
When Box was selected:
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Left)
Position of left
edge
–100.00 to +100.00
2 (Right)
3 (Top)
Position of right
edge
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
0.00 to 100.00
Position of top
edge
Setting Key Mask Shapes and
Positions
4 (Bottom)
5 (Soft)
Position of
bottom edge
information about how to make basic key mask settings.
Softness of
edges
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Mask.
The Mask menu appears.
Advanced Key Operations
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Pattern was selected:
Key memory operating modes
Knob
Description
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
There are two key memory operating modes: simple mode
and full mode. Make a setup setting to select one of the
modes.
The parameters stored differ as shown below, according to
the operating mode.
1 (Size)
2 (Soft)
Size of pattern
Softness of
edges
a)
3 (Pattern)
Pattern number
1 to 24
Parameters stored in simple mode
• Key type
• Key inversion (Key Invert)
a) Same as patterns in the standard group.
To invert a mask signal
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Mask menu, press [Mask Invert],
turning it on.
• Adjustment settings for the particular key type
- Luminance key and linear key: Clip, Gain, Density,
and Filter settings, clean mode on and off.
- Chroma key: Settings excluding color cancel, Y
balance, foreground video process, window, and
shadow.
To transform a mask pattern
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Mask menu, press one of the
following buttons, depending on how you want to
transform the pattern.
- Pattern key: Size, Soft, Density
Parameters stored in full mode
All key settings, except for transitions
For details about operation, see the sections on effect
transformations (on the pages indicated in parentheses).
On how to turn the key memory function on or off and
select the key memory operating mode, see “Selecting the
Rotation: Rotate the mask pattern to a specified angle
(page 95). Note that the parameter Magnitude is not
available for masks.
Multi: Arrange several examples of the same mask pattern
(page 96). When using a mask, operate in the same
way as “For a PGM/PST wipe.”
To recall settings stored in key memory
When the key memory function on, stored settings are
recalled automatically at the same time that key signals are
selected.
Using the Show Key Function
Show key is a function to output, for a specified time, key-
processed B&W signals from Edit PVW output.
Make a setup setting (with the Key menu) to enable and
disable the show key function, and to set the length of the
output time.
To output show key signals
In the key >M/E Key1 >Main menu, press [Show Key],
turning it on.
Show key signals are output when the button lights. Output
ends after the specified hold time.
You can stop show key output by pressing [Show Key]
during the output.
Using Key Memory
The key memory function allows the keyer settings on
each cross-point button to be automatically stored, so that
the next time the same cross-point button is selected these
settings are recalled automatically.
110
Advanced Key Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input video processing (see page 112)
r
Color Correction
Primary color correction (see page 113)
r
Secondary color correction (see page 114)
Color correction (CCR) enables input video color
correction (black balance/white balance adjustment,
gamma correction, knee correction, etc.).
r
RGB clip (see page 115)
r
Luminance processing (see page 115)
Note
r
The following optional boards are required to use the color
correction function.
• MKS-2420M Color Corrector Board
• MKS-2440 Frame Memory Board Set
The MKS-2420M is mounted on the MKS-2440.
Spot color adjustment (see page 117)
r
Output video processing (see page 118)
r
YUV clip (see page 118)
You can use two color correctors in each step. You can
Selecting the Color Correction
Signal
CCR Menu
To apply color correction to a signal, capture the signal
from the CCR1 bus or CCR2 bus.
The following signals can be selected from these buses.
• All primary inputs
For color correction operations, use the CCR menu.
• Frame memory video 1 to 3
• Frame memory key 1 to 3
• White
• Black
• Color background
To access the CCR menu
1
From the top menu, select CCR >CCR1 or CCR2.
A popup window appears.
To select a signal
1
Press the [CCR1] or [CCR2] AUX delegation button.
The cross-point button rows are assigned to the CCR1
bus or CCR2 bus.
2
Press a button in a cross-point button row to select the
desired signal.
The button lights in red (high tally) if the signal on the
CCR1 bus or CCR2 bus is included in the program
video (final output video). Otherwise it lights in amber
(low tally).
2
Press the button for the menu you want to use, to
display the menu.
Output of Color Correction Results
You can assign signals to which color correction has been
applied to cross-point buttons, and output the corrected
signals by pressing those buttons.
For details of the assignment process, see “Selecting
Flow of Color Correction Operations
Color correction is carried out in the following steps.
Color Correction
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the copy
source color corrector and the copy destination color
corrector.
To enable a color corrector
The following example shows how to enable color
corrector 1 (CCR1). You can proceed in the same way to
enable CCR2.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
1
2
From the top menu, select CCR >CCR1.
• Turn the knobs.
Press a menu button other than [Mask1] or [Mask2] to
display the menu.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (From No) Copy source color
corrector selection
1 or 2
3
Press [CCR], turning it on.
4 (To No)
Copy destination color 1 or 2
corrector selection
This enables all of the functions of color corrector 1.
When you select either the source or destination color
corrector, the other color corrector is selected
automatically.
To return all color corrector settings to the
defaults
The following example shows how to proceed for color
corrector 1 (CCR1). You can proceed in the same way for
CCR2.
3
Press [Copy] to execute a copy, or [Swap] to execute a
swap.
To undo a copy or swap
1
2
From the top menu, select CCR >CCR1.
Press [Undo] in the Copy/Swap menu. The color
correctors are restored to their states before the copy or
swap.
Press a menu button other than [Mask1] or [Mask2] to
display the menu.
3
Press [Unity All].
Input Video Processing
A message appears asking if you want to return all
settings to the default settings.
You can adjust the following for YUV signals.
• Overall video signal gain
• Y signal gain
• C signal gain
• Hue delay
4
Press [Yes] in the message to return to the defaults, or
[No] to cancel.
• Black level
If you pressed [Yes], all color corrector settings are
returned to the default settings.
To execute input video processing
Display the Input Process menu, then proceed as follows.
To copy or swap color corrector settings
1
From the top menu, select CCR >Copy/Swap.
The Copy/Swap menu appears. The status area shows
a copy source list (From) on the left and a copy
destination list (To) on the right.
1
2
Press [Input Proc], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
112
Color Correction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Press [Primary], turning it on.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Video Gain) Overall video
signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
As required, press the button for the adjustment you
want to make, and turn the knobs to adjust the
parameters.
2 (Y Gain)
3 (C Gain)
Y signal gain
C signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
–200.00 to +200.00
–180.00 to +180.00
–116.90 to +116.90
[Black]:
4 (Hue Delay) Hue delay
5 (Black Level) Black level
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Red)
Black balance of R
(red) signal
–100.00 to +100.00
To return input video processing parameters to
their default settings
Press [Unity].
2 (Green) Black balance of G
(green) signal
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
3 (Blue)
Black balance of B
(blue) signal
4 (All)
Black balance of R, G, Red value is shown
and B signals
(adjusted at once)
Primary Color Correction
Adjust the following for RGB signals.
• Black balance
• White balance
[White]:
• Gamma correction
• Knee correction
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Red)
White balance of R
(red) signal
0.00 to 200.00
White balance
adjustment
2 (Green) White balance of G
(green) signal
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00
Output level
Output level
3 (Blue)
White balance of B
(blue) signal
Gamma
correction
4 (All)
White balance of R, G, Red value is shown
and B signals
(adjusted at once)
Input level
Black balance adjustment
Knee
correction
Input level
[Gamma]:
Unadjusted signal
Adjusted signal
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Red)
Gamma correction of –100.00 to +100.00
R (red) signal
2 (Green) Gamma correction of –100.00 to +100.00
G (green) signal
3 (Blue)
Gamma correction of –100.00 to +100.00
B (blue) signal
To execute primary color correction
4 (All)
Gamma correction of Red value is shown
R, G, and B signals
(adjusted at once)
Display the Primary menu, and carry out the following
operation.
[Knee]:
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Red)
Knee correction of R
(red) signal
20.00 to 75.00
2 (Green) Knee correction of G 20.00 to 75.00
(green) signal
3 (Blue)
Knee correction of B
(blue) signal
20.00 to 75.00
Color Correction
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
7
Primary menu.
Knob
Description
Setting values
4 (All)
Knee correction of R, Red value is shown
G, and B signals
(adjusted at once)
Press [Mask] and adjust the following parameters.
When Box was selected as the mask source:
To return primary color correction parameters to
their default settings
Press [Unity].
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Left)
2 (Right)
3 (Top)
Left edge position –100.00 to +100.00
Right edge position –100.00 to +100.00
Top edge position
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
To mask part of the primary color
correction
4 (Bottom)
Bottom edge
position
5 (Soft)
Degree of softness 0.00 to 100.00
of box
Note
The mask function is common to the following color
correction functions.
• Primary color correction
When Pattern was selected as the mask source:
• Secondary color correction
• Luminance processing
• Spot color adjustment
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (H Position) Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00
2 (V Position) Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00
0.00 to 100.00
For example, if in primary color correction you set mask 1
to a box, then in secondary color correction set mask 1 to
a pattern, this also changes the setting in primary color
correction to the pattern.
3 (Size)
4 (Soft)
Pattern size
Degree of softness 0.00 to 100.00
of pattern edge
5 (Pattern)
Pattern number
1 to 24
Here the procedure for mask 1 operation is described by
way of example. You can carry out mask 2 operation in a
similar way.
To invert the mask source
Press [Mask Invert] in the Primary menu.
1
Press [Mask] in the Primary menu.
A popup window appears.
Secondary Color Correction
You can adjust the following across a 30° range around
the center point of the color, for each of six colors (red,
green, blue, yellow, cyan, and magenta).
• Luminance
• Saturation
• Hue delay
2
3
Press [Mask 1] to apply a mask.
To execute secondary color correction
Display the Secondary menu, then proceed as follows.
Press the 3rd menu title button from the top.
4
5
Press [Mask 1].
The Mask 1 menu appeas.
Note that the mask menu 1 can also be accessed from
the CCR >CCR1 menu.
Set the mask source and mask pattern transformation
method.
For details about operation, refer to “Setting Key
114
Color Correction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Press [Secondary], turning it on.
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Green)
Dark/white clip of G –50.00 to +150.00
(green) signal
Press the button for the color to adjust ([Blue], [Cyan],
[Green], [Yellow], [Red], or [Magenta]), then adjust
the following parameters.
3 (Blue)
4 (All)
Dark/white clip of B –50.00 to +150.00
(blue) signal
Dark/white clip R, G, Red value is
and B signals
(adjusted
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue delay
Setting values
shown
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
–100.00 to +100.00
0.00 to 200.00
simultaneously)
To return RGB clip parameters to their default
settings
3 (Hue
Delay)
–180.00 to +180.00
Press [Unity].
To return secondary color correction parameters
to their default settings
Luminance Processing
Press [Unity].
You can divide the luminance levels of YUV signals into
three regions (Dark, Middle, and Bright), and adjust the
video signals of each region separately.
To mask part of the secondary color
correction
Press [Mask] in the Secondary menu, turning it on. The
proceed as explained in “To mask part of the primary color
1 Under Dark point
2 Middle/Dark point
3 Bright/Middle point
4 Over Bright point
Dark region
Middle region
Bright region
RGB Clip
You can make the following adjustments for RGB signals.
• Dark clip (lower limit of signal level)
• White clip (upper limit of signal level)
To execute luminance processing
Display the Luminance Process menu, then proceed as
follows.
To execute RGB clip
Display the RGB Clip menu, then proceed as follows.
1
2
Press [RGB Clip], turning it on.
1
2
Press [Lum Proc], turning it on.
Press [Mode].
Press [Dark] or [White], then set the following
parameters.
A popup window appears so that you can select the
adjustment mode.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Red)
Dark/white clip of R –50.00 to +150.00
(red) signal
3
Depending on what you want to adjust, press one of
the following to select an adjustment mode.
Color Correction
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tint: Add a specified color to the original video
signal.
Color Modify: Adjust the original video signal.
Y Modify: Adjust the output levels of the input
luminance signal.
Knob
Description
Setting values
4 (Under D Lvl) Luminance level at –50.00 to +50.00
lower limit of Dark
region
[Bound Soft] parameters:
Set the degree of boundary softness of the three
regions.
4
If you selected [Tint] or [Color Modify], proceed to
step 5. If you selected [Y Modify], adjust the
following parameters.
Knob
Description
Setting values
Knob
Description
White balance
Black balance
Setting values
1 (Over B Soft)
Degree of softness 15.00 to 70.00
at upper limit of
Bright region
1 (White)
2 (Black)
3 (Y Lift)
0.00 to 200.00
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
2 (Mid B Soft)
3 (D Mid Soft)
Degree of softness 15.00 to 42.50
at boundary
between Bright and
Middle regions
Curvature of
luminance level
curve
4 (Y Dark) Position of maximum –7.30 to +109.58
Degree of softness 15.00 to 42.50
at boundary
between Middle
point of luminance
level curve
and Dark regions
Output signal
luminance
level
4 (Under D Soft) Degree of softness 15.00 to 70.00
Output signal
luminance
level
at lower limit of
Dark region
6
Press [Dark], [Middle], or [Bright] to select a region,
then adjust the following parameters.
Y Lift
White
balance
adjustment
Tint mode:
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
–100.00 to +100.00
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
Y Dark
Input signal
luminance level
Inputsignal
luminance
level
Black balance
adjustment
Signal before
adjustment
Signal after
adjustment
Color modify mode:
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Lum)
2 (C Gain)
Luminance
–100.00 to +100.00
0.00 to 200.00
5
Press [Bound Level] or [Bound Soft], and make
settings for the three regions (Dark, Middle, Bright).
C signal gain
3 (Hue Delay) Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
[Bound Level] parameters:
Set the boundaries of the three regions.
Knob
Description
Setting values
To return luminance processing parameters to
their default settings
Press [Unity].
1 (Over B Lvl) Luminance level at 50.00 to 150.00
upper limit of Bright
region
2 (Mid B Lvl)
3 (D Mid Lvl)
Luminance level at 10.00 to 120.00
boundary between
Bright and Middle
To mask part of the luminance processing
Press [Mask] in the Luminance Process menu, turning it
on. Then proceed as explained in “To mask part of the
regions
Luminance level at –20.00 to +90.00
boundary between
Middle and Dark
regions
116
Color Correction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spot Color Adjustment
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
–7.31 to +109.59
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
4 (Gain)
You can change the color in a specified region to another
color, without affecting other regions. You can also adjust
the following in the regions outside the spot color
adjustment region.
Key gain
–100.00 to
+100.00
• Video signal overall gain
• Y signal gain
• Y signal offset
• C signal gain
• C signal hue delay
6
7
Press [Window], turning it on., to adjust the key
detection range for spot color adjustment.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
0.00 to 100.00
To execute spot color adjustment
Display the Spot menu, the proceed as follows.
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
Press [Spot], and adjust the replacement color.
Knob
Description
Luminance
Saturation
Hue
Setting values
–7.31 to +109.59
0.00 to 100.00
359.99 to 0.00
1 (Lum)
2 (Sat)
3 (Hue)
To return spot color adjustment parameters to
their default settings
Press [Spot Unity].
1
2
Press [Spot], turning it on.
Press [Sample Mark], turning it on.
To mask part of the spot color adjustment
When [Sample Mark] is on, the effects of color
Press [Mask] in the Spot menu, turning it on. Then proceed
as explained in “To mask part of the primary color
adjustment outside the region of spot color adjustment
and output video processing are temporarily disabled.
(Turning [Sample Mark] off restores the former state.)
To adjust colors outside the spot color
adjustment region
3
Adjust the following parameters so that the color you
want to change is included within the sample mark.
1
2
With [Spot] on in the Spot menu, press [Outer Proc],
turning it on.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (H Position) Horizontal position –100.00 to +100.00
2 (V Position) Vertical position
3 (Size) Size
–100.00 to +100.00
1.00 to 100.00
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Description
Setting values
4
5
Press [Auto Start], to adjust the key automatically.
1 (Video Gain) Overall gain of –200.00 to +200.00
video signal
Note
2 (Y Gain)
Y signal gain
C signal gain
Hue delay
–200.00 to +200.00
–200.00 to +200.00
–180.00 to +180.00
–116.90 to +116.90
This automatic adjustment does not carry out key gain
adjustment. If required, adjust the key gain as shown
in step 5.
3 (C Gain)
4 (Hue Delay)
5 (Black Level) Black level
Press [Key Adjust], then adjust the following key
parameters.
Color Correction
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return [Outer Proc] parameters to their default
settings
Press [Outer Unity].
YUV Clip
You can adjust the following for luminance signals and
color difference signals.
• White clip (Upper limit of luminance signal level)
• Dark clip (Lower limit of luminance signal level)
• Positive clip (Maximum amplitude in positive direction
of color difference signal)
• Negative clip (Maximum amplitude in Negative
direction of color difference signal)
Output Video Processing
You can adjust the following for YUV signals.
• Overall gain of video signal
• Y signal gain
• Y signal offset
• C signal gain
• C signal hue delay
To execute YUV clip
Display the YUV Clip menu, then proceed as follows.
To execute output video processing
Display the Output Process menu, then proceed as follows.
1
2
Press [YUV Clip], turning it on.
Depending on the signal you want to adjust, press one
of the following to select the target for adjustment.
1
2
Press [Output Proc], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Luminance: Luminance signal
Chroma: Color difference signal.
Knob
Description
Setting values
3
Adjust the following parameters for the signal selected
in step 2.
1 (Video Gain) Overall gain of
video signal
–200.00 to +200.00
2 (Y Gain)
3 (C Gain)
Y signal gain
C signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
–200.00 to +200.00
–180.00 to +180.00
–116.90 to +116.90
Luminance:
Knob
Description
Setting values
–6.85 to +109.13
–6.85 to +109.13
4 (Hue Delay) Hue delay
5 (Black Level) Black level
1 (White Clip) White clip
2 (Dark Clip)
Dark clip
Note
When [Sample Mark] in the Spot menu is on, the effects of
color adjustment outside the region of spot color
adjustment and output video processing are temporarily
disabled.
Chroma:
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (U Posi Clip) Positive clip
adjustment for
–113.39 to +113.39
Turning [Sample Mark] off restores the former state.
U signal
To return output video processing parameters to
their default settings
Press [Unity].
2 (U Nega Clip) Negative clip
adjustment for
–113.39 to +113.39
–113.39 to +113.39
U signal
3 (V Posi Clip) Positive clip
adjustment for V
signal
118
Color Correction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knob
Description
Setting values
Frame Memory
4 (V Nega Clip) Negative clip
adjustment for V
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input
video can be frozen and written to memory, for further use
as material for editing.
To return YUV clip parameters to their default
settings
Press [Unity].
Overview
Frame memory capacity
The number of frames which can be saved in frame
memory varies as shown below, depending on the signal
format used by the switcher system.
s
System
Signal format Frame memory capacity
HD system 720p
1080i
88 frames
58 frames
1080PsF
SD system 480i
576i
444 frames
Hardware and software requirements for
using frame memory
To use frame memory, the switcher system requires the
following options.
• MKS-2440 Frame Memory Board Set
• BZS-2440M Frame Memory Upgrade Software
However, the BZS-2440M software is not required when
the signal format is 480i or 576i.
Flow of Frame Memory Operations
The flow of frame memory operations is as follows.
Assign frame memory output to a cross-point.
r
Select the input signal (video before freeze, etc.). (See
page 120.)
r
Freeze the video at the desired point and save an image file
r
• Recall a desired freeze image from an image file saved
image file saved in memory.
Frame Memory
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Select the desired signal in the cross-point button rows
of the auxiliary bus control block.
Preparations
The selected signal is input to frame memory.
Assigning frame memory output to cross-
point buttons
Frame memory images (freeze images, etc.) can be
assigned to either the video or key channels of frame
memory 1 to 3.
Freezing Images and Saving Them
to Memory
The following three types of output destinations are
available (six channels).
• FM 1 Video and FM 1 Key
1
From the top menu, select Frame Memory> Freeze.
The Freeze menu appears.
• FM 2 Video and FM 2 Key
• FM 3 Video and FM 3 Key
Output of selected frame memory
Before using frame memory images, you need to assign
one or more of the six channels listed above to cross-point
buttons.
Key thumbnail
Video thumbnail
You can assign channels in pairs. For example, if you
assign FM 1 Video and FM 1 Key as a pair, you can select
both the video and the key with the same cross-point
button.
For details about assignment operations, refer to
Selecting Input Signals for Frame
Memory
Select the signal (video, etc.) to be processed with frame
memory.
There are two buses for selecting input video signals.
Frame memory video bus: Allows the frame memory
video input signal to be selected.
2
To change the frame memory output destination (FM1
in the above figure), press [FM Output].
For details, see “To select frame memory output”
Frame memory key bus: Allows the frame memory key
input signal to be selected.
3
4
To operate on video and key as a pair, press [Pair],
turning it on.
1
In the auxiliary bus control block of the control panel,
press the AUX delegation button [FRAME MEM],
turning it on.
When [Pair] is turned off in step 3, press one of the
output buttons (in the above figure, [FM1V] or
[FM1K]) to select the target.
2
Switch the [SRC BUS] button in the auxiliary bus
control block as follows.
The selected button turns light blue.
• To select the video input signal, turn the [SRC BUS]
button off.
The auxiliary bus switches to the frame memory
video bus. In this case, the key assigned as a pair to
the selected video is automatically selected on the
frame memory key bus.
• To select the key input signal, turn the [SRC BUS]
button on.
The auxiliary bus switches to the frame memory key
bus. In this case, you can select the key
independently of the video.
5
6
Press [Freeze] to display “Enable.”
A freeze frame can now be captured.
If required, apply a mask to the selected signal. (See
7
At the point you want to freeze, press one of the
following.
Frame Frz: Freeze an image frame.
Field Frz: Freeze an image field.
120
Frame Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For a key file, “(k)” is automatically appended to the file
name.
Note
In the following signal formats, a field freeze is not
possible.
1080PsF/23.976, 1080PsF/24, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/
29.97, 720P/59.94
Saving files with [Pair] on/off
When saving with [Pair] turned off, a file is created for
either the video or key. (Referred to below as an “Single
file.”)
When [Pair] is turned on, both video and key files are
created with the same name. (Referred to below as “Pair
files.”)
This freezes the input image.
In this state, no freeze image has yet been saved. You
can repeat this operation any number of times, until the
desired freeze image is obtained.
To apply a box-shaped mask to a freeze image
8
When you have obtained the freeze image you want,
press [Store] in the Freeze menu, and confirm the
name in the keyboard window.
1
2
To link the video and key with a mask, press [Mask
Link] in the Freeze menu, turning it on.
For details of the saved file names, see the next item,
“File names.”
When [Mask Link] is turned off in step 1, press one of
the output buttons ([FM1V] or [FM1K] in the example
If, before saving the freeze image, you press [FM
Output] to switch the frame memory, the freeze image
is saved automatically in freeze memory. (Automatic
save)
The selected button turns light blue.
Note
Even when [Pair] is on, if [Mask Link] is off, you can
apply different masks to the video and key. In this
case, press the output button to select it for the
operation.
The freeze image is saved in memory, and a thumbnail
for the video and/or key appears.
The “Remain” count under [Store], showing the
number of images that can be saved, decreases by one
(or by two if [Pair] is turned on in step 3).
3
4
Press [Box Mask], turning it on.
Set the parameters for the four sides of the box.
Number of images which can be
saved / maximum number of images
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Left)
2 (Right)
3 (Top)
Left edge position
Right edge position
Top edge position
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
–100.00 to +100.00
4 (Bottom) Bottom edge position –100.00 to +100.00
(If you turned [Mask Link] on in step 1, the parameters
for video side are shown.)
To select frame memory output
1
Press [FM Output].
Note
Saved freeze images are erased if you power off the
switcher, or execute a reset with the setup menu. Freeze
images which you do not want to erase must be saved as
files to the hard disk or a “Memory Stick”. (See Chapter 7
A popup window appears.
File names
• When you press [Store], a keyboard window appears,
and the default file name, such as “image001” appears.
To change this, enter the file name in the keyboard
window. (Maximum eight alphanumeric characters)
• For automatic saving, the file name is automatically set
to “auto_000,” “auto_001,” and so on.
2
Press one of the following.
FM1 V/K: Frame memory 1 video and key
FM2 V/K: Frame memory 2 video and key
FM3 V/K: Frame memory 3 video and key
Frame Memory
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, if you select [FM2 V/K], the thumbnails
and [FM2K].
4
5
When [Pair] is turned off, press one of the output
buttons, to select it for the operation.
The selected button turns light blue.
To delete a freeze image
Press [Frz Off]. The thumbnails in the Freeze menu
black.
Do one of the following to select the image file to
recall.
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.
• Press the list arrow buttons.
Recalling Freeze Images Saved in
Frame Memory
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description Setting values
1 (No)
File number 1 to number of saved image
files
1
From the top menu, select Frame Memory >Recall.
The Recall menu appears.
Freeze image selection in the list is reflected in
thumbnail selection, and vice versa.
Output of selected frame memory
6
7
If [Pair] is off, press the [Video] or [Key] thumbnail to
select the target.
The selected button turns light blue.
Press [Recall].
This recalls the freeze image, which appears in
[FM1V] and/or [FM1K].
Managing Image Files
Renaming an image file
Video
1
From the top menu, select Frame Memory >Rename.
List of saved image files
Key
The Rename menu appears.
Regardless of whether pair mode is on or off, all saved
frame memory image files appear in the list.
Thumbnails of saved freeze images
(change with selection in the list)
Names of the selected image files
2
3
To change the frame memory output destination
([FM1] in the above figure), press [FM Output].
For details, see “To select frame memory output”
Press [Pair], turning it on/off.
The selection for operation changes as follows.
On: Only Pair files appear in the list, and the operation
applies simultaneously to the video and key files.
Off: The list shows both Pair files and Single files, and
operations apply separately to the video and key
files.
2
Select the file to operate on.
About Single files and Pair files, see “Saving files with
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.
• Press the arrow buttons to select from the list.
122
Frame Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Turn the knob.
The thumbnail button turns yellow. The file name in
the list also turns yellow, indicating that this is the file
to be affected.
Knob
Description Setting values
1 (No) File number 1 to number of saved image
files
4
5
To delete more than one file, repeat steps 2 and 3 to
select the files.
For Pair files, the video and key files are selected
together.
It is not possible to select either individually.
Press [Delete].
A message appears, asking for confirmation of the
deletion.
3
4
Press [Rename].
A popup window appears.
6
To carry out the deletion press [Yes], and to cancel
press [No].
Enter the new name, and press [Enter].
This renames the selected file.
If you press [Yes], this deletes the file or files. The
number of files that can be saved shown on the
[Delete] button increases by the number of files
deleted.
Deleting an image file
If you press [No], the system returns to the state before
step 2.
1
From the top menu, select Frame Memory >Delete.
The Delete menu appears.
Regardless of whether pair mode is on or off, all saved
frame memory image files appear in the list.
2
3
Select the file to be deleted.
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.
• Press the arrow buttons to select from the list.
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description Setting values
1 (No) File number 1 to number of saved image
files
• To select all files, press [Select All], turning it on.
If you have selected [Select All], skip to step 5.
Select either video or key.
• To delete a video image file, press [Video] above the
thumbnail.
• To delete a key image file, press [Key] above the
thumbnail.
Frame Memory
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cross-point hold: When the snapshot is recalled, the
1)
cross-point button selection remains unchanged.
The same setting is used for both A and B buses. Also,
the same setting is used for both PGM and PST buses.
Key disable: When the snapshot is recalled, the key
settings (including key on/off states, if specified by
Snapshots
What are Snapshots?
1)
setup settings) remain unchanged. This can be set
The term “snapshot” refers to a function whereby the
various settings required to apply a particular effect to an
image are saved in memory as a set of data, for recall as
required, to recover the original state.
independently for each keyer.
Effect dissolve: The transition from the state before the
snapshot recall to the snapshot settings is carried out
smoothly, by a dissolve.
Snapshot operations use the Flexi Pad control block.
Auto transition: An auto transition starts the instant the
snapshot is recalled. The auto transition setting is valid
for M/E and PGM/PST.
Snapshot types
There are two types of snapshot: those called simply
“snapshot,” and effect snapshots. They differ in the types
of data saved and the save destination registers (memory
locations for saving data).
1) There are three hold modes for key buses: Xpt Hold, Key Disable, and Key
Disable with Status. Select one of the modes with the setup menu. See
Usable temporary attributes
The following table shows the temporary attributes which
can be used in each region.
Snapshots
These are sets of data saved for each region (functional
unit block) to enable recall of video states.
Yes: Usable No: Not usable
Snapshot target data and number of registers
Attribute
Region
M/E
Yes
PGM/PST
Yes
MISC
Yes
No
Target data
Number of registers
(register numbers)
Cross-point hold
Key disable
M/E region data
99 (1 to 99)
99 (1 to 99)
99 (1 to 99)
Yes
Yes
PGM/PST region data
Effect dissolve
Auto transition
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Following data included in MISC
regions
Yes
Yes
• Color backgrounds
• AUX 1 to 4
Bus override
Even when the setting of the temporary attribute “cross-
point hold” is off, you can recall a snapshot while
maintaining the current cross-point selection. This
function is called “bus override.”
Note
In this version, PGM/PST and MISC data cannot be saved
and recalled individually.
On how to use the bus override function, see page 126.
Effect snapshots
These are sets of data saved to enable recall of M/E effect
settings and PGM/PST wipe settings.
Effect snapshot target data and number of registers
Target data
Number of registers
(register numbers)
Effect pattern numbers and
modifiers set on M/E bank
10 (1 to 10)
Effect (wipe) pattern numbers and 10 (1 to 10)
modifiers set on PGM/PST bank
Snapshot attributes
Temporary attributes
When a snapshot is recalled, you can specify up to four
additional attributes called “temporary attributes.” They
are as follows.
124
Snapshots
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.
Saving Snapshots
The most significant digit in the numeric display
shows the number of the selected bank.
This is also indicated by the display on the memory
recall buttons. For example, the display is as shown
below when bank 3 is selected.
3
2
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
37
34
31
40
38
35
32
39
36
33
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
STORE
MCRO
EFF
DISS
AUTO
TRNS
EFF
DISS
AUTO
TRNS
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
6
7
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
The snapshot can now be saved.
7
4
5,8
6
Press the memory recall button corresponding to
register in which you want to save the snapshot.
1
2
Set up the state that you want to save as a snapshot.
Press the [SNAPSHOT] button, turning it on.
Note
The Flexi Pad control block enters snapshot operation
mode.
The contents of the corresponding register are
overwritten if you press a button which is lit in orange
or yellow.
3
4
Press and light the region selection button for the
region which you want to save.
The pressed button lights in yellow when the saving of
the snapshot is finished.
The numeric display shows the selected bank number,
followed by the register number.
For example, if you selected register 37, the display
shows “3-37.”
[M/E] button: Selects the M/E region.
[PP/ALL] button: Selects all regions.
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.
The display on the memory recall buttons changes to
the state shown in the above figure. You can now
select the save destination bank.
Banks are the 99 registers divided into 10 groups. The
following table shows the correspondences bank
numbers and register numbers.
Bank number
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
Bank 4
Bank 5
Bank 6
Bank 7
Bank 8
Bank 9
Register number
1 to 10
11 to 20
21 to 30
31 to 40
41 to 50
51 to 60
61 to 70
71 to 80
81 to 90
91 to 99
Snapshots
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flexi Pad control block
Recalling Snapshots
Temporary attribute
Button pressed
Auto transition
[AUTO TRNS] button
Lit in green: Selected
Lit in orange: Not selected
1
See page 124 for the attributes which may be used .
7
4
1
0
8
9
6
3
Note
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
The Cross-point hold and Key disable states last until
the [XPT HOLD] or [XP/KY HOLD] button is pressed
again.
5
2
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
STORE
MCRO
5
Press the memory recall button for the register where
the snapshot that you want is saved (the button is lit in
orange).
EFF
DISS
AUTO
TRNS
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
When the recall is complete, the pressed button lights
in yellow.
2
3
4
The numeric display shows the bank number followed
by the selected register number.
To maintain cross-point states temporarily with
the bus override function
1
Press the [SNAPSHOT] button, turning it on.
Recall the snapshot while holding down a cross-point
button in the A or B row on the M/E bank or a cross-point
button in the PGM or PST row on the PGM/PST bank.
The snapshot is recalled without changing the selection of
the signal on the bus. This operation is not necessary when
cross-point hold is on.
The button lights in amber, and the Flexi Pad control
block enter snapshot operation mode.
Also, the numeric display shows the number of the
bank selected last time, and the number of the register
most recently recalled for the region.
2
3
If the [STORE] button is lit, press the button, turning
it off.
Deleting Snapshots
Select the bank to recall.
1
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [STORE]
button, turning it on.
While holding down the [SNAPSHOT] button, press
the memory recall button for the snapshot that you
want to delete.
4
If you want to use a temporary attribute (see page
124), press one of the following buttons, selecting and
lighting it.
The button goes out after the snapshot is deleted.
M/E and PGM/PST cross-point control blocks, AUX
bus control block
Temporary attribute
Button pressed
Cross-point hold
[XPT HOLD] button in M/E
and PGM/PST cross-point
control blocks
Cross-point hold or key
disable for key bus
[XP/KY HOLD] button in
AUX bus control block
Cross-point hold for Aux
bus
Flexi Pad control block
Temporary attribute
Button pressed
Effect dissolve
[EFF DISS] button
126
Snapshots
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control block
Event
Macros
Menu control block
Disk recorder/Extended VTR file
recalling
a) Not found on 1 M/E panel.
b) In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key, the key state at the time
of event registration (inserted or not inserted) is also saved in the macro.
When the macro is executed, the event is only replayed if the key state
matches the saved state. (Example: For a macro with an event that deletes
a key, when the macro is executed, if the key is inserted it is deleted, but
otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying.)
c) The operations of buttons to which one of Device 1 to Device 6, All Stop,
Shuttle, Jog, Rec, Mcro Only Set, Mcro AT with Rate, or Mcro AT with
A/B is assigned are excluded.
What Are Macros?
The term “macro” refers to the function whereby a
sequence of signal selections and other operations on the
control panel is saved as data in memory, so that it can be
recalled as required to automatically execute the same
sequence of operations.
d) Not found on 1.5 M/E panel.
Macro operations use the Flexi Pad control block.
Pause event
To adjust the execution timing of a particular event (to
delay the start of execution of the event by a particular time
interval), you can store a special event which pauses macro
execution. This event is called a “pause event.” When you
store a pause event, you can set the interval for which the
macro is paused (the pause duration) to any value in the
range 1 to 999 frames. When the set time has elapsed, the
macro is automatically executed.
Macro registers
The area of memory that holds a macro is termed a “macro
register.” There are 99 macro registers, numbered 1 to 99.
Events
The individual control panel operations constituting a
macro are termed “events.” One macro can contain a
maximum of 99 events.
Pause zero event
The following table shows the operations for each control
block of the control panel that can be saved as events in a
macro.
By including a pause event with the time set to zero, you
can make macro execution pause at the pause event.
Control block
Event
Creating a New Macro
M/E cross-point control Cross-point selection
block
PGM/PST cross-point Cross-point selection
control block
4,10
1
AUX bus control block Cross-point selection
M/E transition control
block
Auto transition execution
Cut execution
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
Transition type selection
Next transition selection
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
b) d)
Key On/Off
STORE
MCRO
PGM/PST transition
Transition type selection
Auto transition execution
Cut execution
a)
control block
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
b)
b)
M/E key transition
control block
Auto transition execution
b)
Key On/Off
2
3,5,6,7,8
Downstream key/fade
to black control block
Auto transition execution
b)
Key On/Off
1
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO]
button, turning it on.
Fade to black execution
Flexi Pad control block Recalling the following data
• Snapshots
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro
operation.
• Effect snapshots
Utility control block
Recalling the functions assigned to
c)
buttons
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.
Macros
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a) XX: The number of the register containing a macro being created or
edited.
The display on the memory recall buttons changes to
the state shown in the above figure. You can now
select the save destination bank.
6
7
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button to toggle the
auto insert mode on or off (see the next item).
For details of the correspondence between banks and
Create the events (carry out the control panel
operations to be registered as events in the macro).
3
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.
The most significant digit in the numeric display
shows the number of the selected bank.
Each memory recall button shows the corresponding
register number and register status for the selected
bank.
Lit orange: Register holding macro data
Lit yellow: Last recalled register
Off: Empty register
For details of events that can be registered, see page
127.
• When auto insert mode is on, execution of a control
panel operation automatically registers an event in
the macro.
• When auto insert mode is off, proceed to step 8.
4
5
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
Note
During macro creation or editing, if you press any of
the mode selection buttons other than the [MCRO]
button ([TRANSRATE] button, and so on), the
executed operation is also registered as an event. In
this case, the [MCRO] button stays lit red. To return to
macro edit mode from this state, press the [MCRO]
button.
Press the memory recall button showing the register
number to be registered.
The Flexi Pad control block enters macro edit mode,
and the [MCRO] button lights in red.
The memory recall buttons change as shown below.
AUTO
INS
STOR
01
EXIT
PAUS
INS
8
9
When auto insert mode is off, press the [INS] button to
register the event.
ALL
DEL
Repeat steps 7 and 8 to register the required events in
the macro.
MOD
This registers the events in the macro, in the order the
operations were carried out on the control panel.
The numeric display appears as follows.
<<
PREV
>>
NEXT
Button name
Function
Example:
Total number of events
INS
Add a new event after the current
event.
Current event number
MOD
DEL
Modify an event.
Delete the current event, or delete all
events within a macro register (when
the [ALL] button is turned on).
10Press the [STORE] button or memory recall button
PAUS
ALL
Enter pause duration input mode.
[STOR XX] (where XX is the register number).
Specify all events within a macro
register as editing targets.
This saves the created macro in the register, and the
Flexi Pad control block returns to the state before
macro editing began. The [MCRO] button lights
amber.
EXIT
Exit macro edit mode without saving
the edited macro.
AUTO INS
Enter auto insert mode.
Switching auto insert mode on or off
In the auto insert mode, when creating or editing a macro,
an operation carried out on the control panel is
automatically registered as an event.
By pressing the [AUTO INS] button, turning it in green,
the auto insert mode is on.
a)
Exit macro edit mode after saving the
edited macro.
STOR XX
<< PREV
>> NEXT
Go to the previous event.
Go to the next event.
128
Macros
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the [AUTO INS] button lights in orange (this mode
is off), it is necessary to press the [INS] button for each
operation to register the event.
To include all information associated with an
operation when registering a macro event
When registering an auto transition operation as an event,
you can register the auto transition event to include the
transition rate and background A/B bus selection status.
To use this capability, assign the following functions to
buttons in the utility control block, and turn the relevant
button on before you start an event to register.
Note
When you start macro creation or editing with the macro
insert mode is automatically on. When “Step” is selected
as the macro execution mode, the auto insert mode is
automatically off.
Macro AT with Rate (Macro Auto Trans Event with/
without Rate): When registering an auto transition
macro event, include the transition rate.
Macro AT with A/B Bus (Macro Auto Trans Event
with/without A/B Bus): When registering an auto
transition macro event in the transition control block,
include the background A/B bus cross-point.
Creating a pause event
To create a pause event, use the following procedure.
1
Press the memory recall button [PAUS].
For details of the method of assigning these functions to
buttons, see “Utility Settings (Utility Menu)” (page 170).
The Flexi Pad control block enters pause duration
input mode, and the memory recall buttons appear as
in the following figure.
Recalling a Macro Register and
Executing a Macro
7
4
1
0
8
5
9
6
3
There are two macro execution modes.
Normal execution mode: When execution of an event is
completed, the next event is executed automatically.
Step execution mode: When execution of an event is
completed, macro execution is paused.
2
PAUS
ENTR
CLR
You can switch the normal execution mode and step
execution mode in the Setup menu. See “Macro Execution
2
3
Enter the pause duration (0 to 999 (frames)).
When a macro is paused at a pause zero event or when a
macro is paused in step execution mode, restarting such
macro is referred to as a “macro take operation.”
If you set the duration to “0,” macro execution will be
paused at the position of this pause event.
Press the [PAUS ENTR] button.
This sets the pause duration, and inserts the pause
event.
appearance The appearance of the memory recall
buttons returns to the before execution of step 1.
Events requiring adjustment when creating a
macro
The following event requires time for execution to
complete, and therefore when executed within a macro
sequence, a pause event must be inserted to adjust the
timing.
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR cue up
For a macro to cue up a VTR and then play back, for
example, a pause event must be inserted between the cue
up event and the playback event.
Macros
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Executing a macro in normal execution
mode
Notes
• It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a
time.
• During macro execution, recalling the same register
again stops the macro being executed.
• ·Individual events stored in a macro are executed
according to the settings in setup. If you change the
settings in setup, a saved macro may not have the
expected effect.
• During macro execution, if you switch the control panel
to macro edit mode, the macro being executed stops.
• During macro editing it is not possible to execute a
macro.
• If you start execution of a macro by operating a button
for which a macro attachment is set, then before the end
of execution of that macro you cannot recall and execute
a separate macro from the Flexi Pad control block.
1
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF/
WIPE
M/E
PP/
ALL
SNAP
SHOT
STORE
MCRO
BANK
SEL
TRANS
RATE
Executing a macro with pause zero events
set
When execution of a macro is paused, the memory recall
button [TAKE] is lit in orange.
2
3,4
1
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO]
button, turning it on.
To restart the macro execution, press the [TAKE] button.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro
operation.
Executing a macro in step execution mode
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, recall the macro
register.
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.
The display on the memory recall buttons changes to
the state shown in the above figure. You can now
select the save destination bank.
For details of recalling macro registers, see
130).
For details of the correspondence between banks and
The memory recall buttons are assigned to the display
of the [TAKE] button and macro execution status, as
in the following figure.
3
4
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.
The most significant digit in the numeric display
shows the number of the selected bank.
Each memory recall button shows the corresponding
register number and register status for the selected
bank.
Lit orange: Register holding macro data
Lit yellow: Last recalled register
Off: Empty register
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
1
3
03
/05
10
TAKE
Press the memory recall button showing the register
number to be recalled.
TAKE button
Status display (Number of events
executed/total number of events)
The button you pressed lights yellow, the macro
register is recalled, and the macro is executed.
During macro execution, the button you pressed
remains yellow, but flashes. When macro execution
completes, it returns to permanently on.
2
Press the [TAKE] button.
This executes one event within the macro, then stops.
The numeric display shows the bank number followed
by the selected register number.
130
Macros
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of events executed, as shown in the
memory recall button, is incremented by one.
• When auto insert mode is off, proceed to step 4.
For details of events that can be registered, see page
127.
3
Repeat step 2, executing the macro event by event.
When all events in the macro have been executed, the
[TAKE] button goes off.
4
When auto insert mode is off, press the memory recall
button [INS].
This adds the new event after the event specified in
step 1.
Editing a Macro
After carrying out macro editing, be sure to carry out a
Modifying an event
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See page 131.)
Specifying an edit point
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button to toggle the
auto insert mode on or off.
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO]
button, turning it on.
3
4
Carry out the event you want to modify on the control
panel.
2
3
4
5
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
Press the memory recall button [MOD].
This modifies the event at the specified edit point as
carried out in step 3.
Press the memory recall button showing the register
number to be edited.
Deleting an event
The Flexi Pad control block enters macro edit mode,
and the [MCRO] button lights in red.
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See page 131.)
Press the memory recall button [DEL].
For details of the function assignment to the memory
recall buttons in macro edit mode, see step 5 in
This deletes the event specified in step 1.
6
Specify the edit point by the following operation.
Deleting all events within a macro register
• To move the edit point to the event immediately
following the current macro event (the macro event
specified as the current edit point), press the [>>
NEXT] button.
• To move the edit point to the event immediately
preceding the current macro event, press the [<<
PREV] button.
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See page 131.)
Press the memory recall button [ALL], lighting it
green.
3
Press the memory recall button [DEL].
This deletes all events within the register.
Inserting an event
Merging a macro for which a macro
attachment is set
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See previous item.)
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button to toggle the
auto insert mode on or off.
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See page 131.)
Press the memory recall button [AUTO INS] to toggle
the auto insert mode on or off.
3
Carry out the event to be added on the control panel.
• When auto insert mode is on, execution of a control
panel operation automatically registers an event in
the macro.
3
Press a button for which a macro attachment is set.
The macro in the register assigned to the button is
merged with the macro being edited.
Macros
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, the macro assigned to the button is not
executed.
For a button whose function is switched by delegation, you
can make a separate macro attachment for each function.
You can make up to 1000 macro attachment settings.
The macro attachment setting is possible for the following
bus buttons. For button locations, see pages in parentheses.
Saving a Macro
Press the [STORE] button or memory recall button [STOR
XX] (where XX is the register number) to save the edited
macro in a register.
Control block
Button
To return to the state before editing, without
saving the macro editing results
a)
block
Press the memory recall button [EXIT] to recall the same
register again. This returns to the state before editing,
without saving the macro editing results.
AUX bus control block
Cross-point buttons (page
M/E transition control block
[AUTO TRANS] button (page
[CUT] button (page 17)
Deleting a Macro
Transition type selection
buttons (page 17)
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO]
button.
[KEY1 ON] to [KEY2 ON]
b) c)
buttons
2
3
4
5
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
Next transition selection
buttons (page 17)
PGM/PST transition control Transition type selection
a)
buttons (page 18)
block
[AUTO TRANS] button (page
Hold down the [MCRO] button, and then press the the
memory recall button showing the corresponding
register number.
[CUT] button (page 18)
b)
M/E key transition control
block
[AUTO TRANS] button
The button you pressed goes off, and this deletes the
macro.
The [STORE] button goes off.
[KEY1 ON] to [KEY2 ON]
buttons (page 18)
c)
b)
Downstream key/fade to
black control block
[AUTO TRANS] button
Using Macro Attachment
[DSK1 ON] to [DSK2 ON]
buttons (page 19)
c)
Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register
is assigned to a control panel button, linking the execution
of the button function with a macro execution.
Select one of the following three linking modes to make
the macro attachment.
Pre macro: Mode in which the button function is executed
after macro execution has completed
Post macro: Mode in which the macro is executed after
carrying out the button function
[FTB] button (page 18)
Utility control block
DEVICE/UTILITY operation
d)
buttons (page 22)
ENABLE/UTILITY operation
d)
buttons (page 22)
a) Not found on 1 M/E panel.
b) When you attach macros to buttons that turn independent key transitions
on and off, operations which go from on to off are distinguished from
operations which go from off to on. For example, if you attach a macro to
an operation which uses a button to go from on to off, the macro is not
executed when you press the same button to go from off to on.
c) Not found on 1.5 M/E panel.
Macro only: Mode in which the button function is not
executed, and the macro only is executed
d) Excluding the buttons to which one of Device 1 to Device 6, All Stop,
Shuttle, Jog, Rec, Mcro Only Set, Mcro AT with Rate, or Mcro AT with
A/B is assigned.
The selection of pre or post macro mode is carried out in
the macro control block. For macro only mode, assign the
selection function to a utility control block button, and
make the selection by pressing the button.
Setting a macro attachment
You can assign any one of the 99 macro registers to a
button.
See above for the buttons for which a macro attachment
can be set.
132
Macros
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Recall the macro register you want to assign to the
button.
• Buttons set in post macro mode: flash amber
• Buttons set in macro only mode: flash green
If you set a macro attachment for an already
macro attached button
It results in either of the following.
When the new setting is made in the same macro
attachment mode as for the old setting: Both old and
new settings are invalid.
For details of the method of operation, see “Executing
To set in macro only mode, press the button to which
[Mcro Only Set] is assigned, turning it on.
To set in pre or post macro mode, proceed to step 3.
When the new setting is made in a different macro
attachment mode from the old setting: The new
setting is valid.
Note
To set in macro only mode, it is first necessary to
assign the “Macro Only Set” function to the buttons in
the utility control block. Carry out this assignment in
the Setup/Diag >Operation >Utility menu. For details,
Note
After setting a macro attachment to a cross-point button in
the cross-point control block, if in the Setup menu you
change the function assignment to the button, the macro
attachment setting disappears.
3
Depending on the macro attachment mode you want to
set, carry out any of the following operations in the
macro control block.
Removing macro attachment settings
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button or [POST MCRO]
button, and press a button that is flashing. The button for
which the macro attachment is set stops flashing and goes
off, and this removes the setting. (See above.)
Pre macro: Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button, and
press the desired button.
Post macro: Hold down the [POST MCRO] button,
and press the desired button.
Macro only: Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button or
[POST MCRO] button, and press the desired
button.
Executing a macro by macro attachment
1
2
Press the [ATTCH ENBL] button, turning it on.
Press the desired button for which a macro attachment
has been set.
MACRO
This recalls the macro register assigned to the button,
and the macro is executed as follows, according to the
operation mode.
PRE
MCRO
POST
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
Pre macro mode: The macro is executed first, and
then the button function is executed.
Post macro mode: The button function is executed
first, and then the macro is executed.
ATTCH ENBL button
POST MCRO button
PRE MCRO button
Macro only mode: The button function is not
executed, and the macro only is executed.
The button you pressed flashes, and the register you
recalled in step 1 is assigned to the button. (When you
set in macro only mode, the button to which [Mcro
Only Set] is assigned goes off.)
• Buttons set in pre- or post-macro mode: flash amber
• Buttons set in macro only mode: flash green
Notes
• It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a
time. Therefore, even if you simultaneously press
multiple buttons for which macro attachments are set,
only one macro is executed.
• During macro execution, recalling the same register
again stops the macro being executed. Therefore,
pressing twice a button for which a macro attachment is
set stops the macro being executed.
• Individual events stored in a macro are executed
according to the settings in setup. If you change the
settings in setup, a saved macro may not have the
expected effect.
To check macro attachment settings
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button or [POST MCRO]
button. While it is held down, buttons for which macro
attachments are set flash as follows.
While the [PRE MCRO] button is held down:
• Buttons set in pre macro mode: flash amber
• Buttons set in macro only mode: flash green
While the [POST MCRO] button is held down:
Macros
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• During macro execution, if you switch the Flexi Pad
control block to macro edit mode, the macro being
executed stops.
• During macro editing, pressing a button for which a
macro attachment is set does not execute the macro.
Safe Title
Safe title is a function which allows you to check whether
that text you add with keys falls within the effective
reception area of television receivers, which is indicated
by a box marker appearing on the monitor screen. This
function also allows you to display a cross marker which
indicates the center of the screen.
To disable macro attachment settings
Press the [ATTCH ENBL] button, turning it off.
In this state, pressing a button for which a macro
attachment is set does not execute the macro.
information about marker types and other safe settings.
Displaying safe title markers with a menu
operation
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Enable/Safe Title.
The Enable/Safe Title menu appears.
2
Press [Safe Title].
Safe title markers appear.
Displaying safe title markers with a button
operation
Press [SAFE TITLE] in the ENABLE/UTILITY operation
button row on the control panel.
information about how to assign the safe title on/off
command to the [SAFE TITLE] button.
134
Safe Title
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
Copy Operation Targets
You can copy setting states between the following four
keyers.
Setup data and key memory data is not copied.
• M/E key 1
• M/E key 2
• Downstream key 1 (DSK1)
• Downstream key 2 (DSK2)
Using Buttons to Copy Key Settings
You can easily copy keyer settings by using the AUX
delegation buttons ([KEY1], [KEY2], [DSK1], and
[DSK2]) in the AUX bus control block to specify the copy
source and copy destination.
Example: Copying M/E key 1 to M/E key 2
[KEY 1] delegation button and press the [KEY 2] button.
A beep sounds and the copy is executed.
Copying
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Copying
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File Operations
Chapter
Overview
Batch Operating on Data
Files
You can save register data, including setup data and
snapshot data, and load the saved data whenever it is
needed. Data can be saved to either the built-in hard disk
The system distinguishes between several different kinds
of data.
• Setup data (including data on the states of system
devices after system power on and key memory setting
data)
Use the File >All menu to operate on data in all categories
(except frame memory image data).
Saving All Data at Once
1
From the top menu, select File >All.
The All menu appears.
• Snapshot setting data
• Effect snapshot setting data
• Frame memory image data (image data saved using the
frame memory function)
You can do the following with data in the above
categories.
• Save, load, and delete all data in all categories (except
frame memory image data) in a single operation.
• Save, load, and delete all data in selected categories
(except frame memory image data) in a single operation.
• Save, load, delete, rename, and copy files containing
frame memory image data.
2
Press [Target Dir].
Notes
• Data saved to hard disk may become unavailable if
trouble occurs on the hard disk. It is recommended that
important data be backed up to “Memory Sticks.”
• Before saving data to a “Memory Stick” or loading or
deleting data from a “Memory Stick,” insert the
“Memory Stick” into the system's “Memory Stick” slot.
A popup window appears.
Overview / Batch Operating on Data Files
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
“1 SYSTEM” is specified as the target directory. (No
other directory can be selected.)
To cancel a load after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the save has been cancelled.
3
Press the button for the desired media type (Hard Disk,
or Memory Stick).
The color of the pressed button is inverted.
Deleting All Data at Once
You can delete the data of all categories saved in files in a
single operation.
4
5
Press [OK].
The popup window closes.
1
(see page 137), to select the type of media storing the
data you want to delete.
In the File >All menu, press [All Save].
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the save.
2
In the File >All menu, press [All Delete].
6
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
save, or [No] to cancel it.
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the deletion.
If you pressed [Yes], the save begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
Note that all existing files in the save destination are
deleted before the save starts.
3
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
deletion, or [No] to cancel it.
If you pressed [Yes], the deletion begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
To cancel a save after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the save has been cancelled.
To cancel the data deletion after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the deletion has been cancelled.
Loading All Data at Once
You can load the data of all categories saved in files to
registers in a single operation.
Note
Data cannot be loaded from files created or saved on
systems other than the MFS-2000.
1
(see page 137), to select the type of media storing the
data you want to load.
2
In the File >All menu, press [All Load].
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the load.
3
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
load, or [No] to cancel it.
If you pressed [Yes], the load begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
Note that all existing data in the load destination
registers are deleted before the load starts.
138
Batch Operating on Data Files
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
5
When you are finished selecting categories, press
[OK].
Batch Operating on Data
Files of Selected
Categories
The popup window closes.
In the File >All (Selected) menu, press [Target Dir].
A popup window opens, in the same way as in step 2
“1 SYSTEM” is specified as the target directory. (No
other directory can be selected.)
Use the File >All (Selected) menu to operate on data in
selected categories (except frame memory image data).
6
Press the button for the desired media type (Hard Disk,
or Memory Stick).
Saving the Data of Selected
Categories
The color of the pressed button is inverted.
You can save the data for one or more categories in a single
operation.
7
8
Press [OK].
The popup window closes.
1
From the top menu, select File >All (Selected).
The All (Selected) menu appears.
In the File >All (Selected) menu, press [Save].
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the save.
9
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
save, or [No] to cancel it.
If you pressed [Yes], the save begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
Note that all existing files in the save destination are
deleted before the save starts.
To cancel a save after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the save has been cancelled.
In the Target Category area, the names of the currently
selected categories are displayed in reverse video.
2
To change the category selection, press [Category
Sel].
Loading the Data of Selected
Categories
A popup window appears.
You can load the data for one or more categories to
registers in a single operation.
1
categories and the type of media storing the data you
want to load.
2
3
In the File >All (Selected) menu, press [Load].
The buttons for the currently selected categories are on
(their color is inverted).
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the load.
3
Press the button for the category that you want to select
(multiple selections possible). To deselect a category,
press the corresponding (on) button, turning it off.
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
load, or [No] to cancel it.
Batch Operating on Data Files of Selected Categories
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you pressed [Yes], the load begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
Note that all existing data in the load destination
registers are deleted before the load starts.
Operating on Individual
Data Files
To cancel a load after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the save has been cancelled.
You can save, load, delete, rename, and copy files
containing frame memory image data.
Loading Data Files
Deleting the Data of Selected
Categories
Proceed as follows to load files containing frame memory
image data to registers.
You can delete the data for one or more categories saved
in files in a single operation.
1
From the top menu, select File >Load.
The Load menu appears.
1
categories and the type of media storing the data you
want to delete.
2
3
In the File >All (Selected) menu, press [Delete].
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the deletion.
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
deletion, or [No] to cancel it.
If you pressed [Yes], the deletion begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
The media, directory, files, and registers used in the
previous load operation appear in the status area.
To cancel the data deletion after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the deletion has been cancelled.
2
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required
the target media.
For details about the procedure, see “Common
3
4
In the File >Load menu, press [Source File].
A file list appears in a popup window.
Do one of the following to select the files to load.
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Start File) Number of first file to
load
1 and upwards
2 (Number) Number of files to load 1 and upwards
5
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].
140
Operating on Individual Data Files
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The popup window closes.
6
7
In the File >Load menu, press [Dest Register].
A list of destination registers appears in a popup
window.
Do one of the following to select the destination
registers.
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
The media, directory, files, and registers used in the
previous save operation appear in the status area.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Start Reg) Number of first
destination register
1 and upwards
2
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required
the target media.
2 (Number) Number of destination 1 and upwards
registers
For details about the procedure, see “Common
8
9
When you are finished selecting registers, press [OK].
The popup window closes.
3
4
To change the save source registers, press [Source
Reg] in the File >Save menu.
In the File >Load menu, press [Load].
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the load.
A register list appears in a popup window.
Do one of the following to select the registers to save.
10Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
load, or [No] to cancel it.
If you pressed [Yes], the load begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
Note that all existing files in the destination registers
are deleted before the load begins.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Start Reg) Number of first register 1 and upwards
to save
To cancel a load after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the load has been cancelled.
2 (Number) Number of registers to 1 and upwards
save
5
6
7
When you are finished selecting registers, press [OK].
The popup window closes.
Saving Data Files
You can save frame memory image data that has been
loaded into registers to files on the desired type of media
(hard disk or “Memory Stick”).
In the File >Save menu, press [Dest File].
A list of destination files appears in a popup window.
Do one of the following to select the destination files.
See the previous section “Loading Data Files” for more
information about how to load frame memory image data
files.
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
1
From the top menu, select File >Save.
The Save menu appears.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Start File) Number of first
destination file
1 and upwards
Operating on Individual Data Files
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Do one of the following to select the files to delete.
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Number) Number of destination 1 and upwards
files
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
8
9
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].
The popup window closes.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Start File) Number of first file to
delete
1 and upwards
In the File >Save menu, press [Save].
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the save.
2 (Number) Number of files to
delete
1 and upwards
5
6
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].
The popup window closes.
10Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
load, or [No] to cancel it.
If you pressed [Yes], the save begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
In the File >Delete menu, press [Delete].
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the deletion.
To cancel a save after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the save has been cancelled.
7
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
deletion, or [No] to cancel it.
If you pressed [Yes], the deletion begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
Deleting Data Files
Proceed as follows to delete frame memory image data
files.
To cancel a file deletion after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the deletion has been cancelled.
1
From the top menu, select File >Delete.
The Delete menu appears.
Renaming Data Files
Proceed as follows to rename a frame memory image data
file.
1
From the top menu, select File >Rename.
The Rename menu appears.
The media, directory, and files used in the previous
delete operation appear in the status area.
2
3
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required
the target media.
For details about the procedure, see “Common
The media, directory, and files used in the previous
rename operation appear in the status area.
In the File >Delete menu, press [Target File].
A file list appears in a popup window.
142
Operating on Individual Data Files
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required
the target media.
The media, directory, and files used in the previous
copy operation appear in the status area.
For details about the procedure, see “Common
2
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required
the target media.
For details about the procedure, see “Common
3
4
In the File >Rename menu, press [Target File].
A file list appears in a popup window.
3
4
In the File >Copy menu, press [Source File].
Do one of the following to select the file to rename.
A list of copy source files appears in a popup window.
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Do one of the following to select the copy source files.
• Turn the knob.
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Start No) Number of file to
rename
1 and upwards
• Turn the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
5
6
7
When you are finished selecting the file, press [OK].
The popup window closes.
1 (Start File) Number of first copy
source file
1 and upwards
2 (Number) Number of copy source 1 and upwards
files
In the File >Rename menu, press [Rename].
5
6
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].
The popup window closes.
Enter the desired file name in the keyboard window
(maximum length 8 characters) and press [Enter].
If you want to copy the files to a different type of
Note
You cannot use the following characters in file names.
space \ / : ; , (comma) . (period) < > * ? “ |
7
8
In the File >Copy menu, press [Dest File].
Copying Data Files
A list of destination files appears in a popup window.
Proceed as follows to copy frame memory image data files.
Do one of the following to select the copy destination
files.
1
From the top menu, select File >Copy.
The Copy menu appears.
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Start File) Number of first copy
destination file
1 and upwards
2 (Number) Number of copy
destination files
1 and upwards
9
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].
The popup window closes.
10In the File >Copy menu, press [Copy].
Operating on Individual Data Files
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to
execute the copy.
11Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the
copy, or [No] to cancel it.
If you pressed [Yes], the copy begins and a window
opens to show its progress.
To cancel a file copy after it has started
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]
in the message box which appears to inform you that
the copy has been cancelled.
Common Operations – Selecting the
Frame Memory Category and the
Target Media
With a file operation menu displayed, proceed as follows.
1
2
3
Press [Category Sel].
A popup window appears.
Select [Frame Memory], and press [OK].
The popup window closes.
To change the media selection from the current
selection to the other type, press one of the following
buttons, depending on the file operation.
File
operation
Media to select
Button to
press
Load
Save
Load source media
[Source Dir]
[Dest Dir]
Save destination
media
Delete
Rename
Copy
Media where target file [Target Dir]
is saved
Media where target file [Target Dir]
is saved
Copy source media
[Source Dir]
[Dest Dir]
Copy destination
media
A popup window opens.
“1 SYSTEM” is specified as the target directory. (No
other directory can be selected.).
4
Press the button for the desired media type (Hard Disk
or Memory Stick), and press [OK].
The popup window closes.
144
Operating on Individual Data Files
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External Device
Operations
Chapter
Preparations
Control From Editing
Systems
The following preparations must be made to control the
MFS-2000 system from an external editing system.
Preparations on the MFS-2000 side
Overview
To use 9-pin serial control signals
Enable the switcher editor mode by doing one of the
following.
• Press the [EDIT] button in the ENABLE/UTILITY
operation button row on the control panel, turning it on.
• Set with a menu.
You can control the MFS-2000 system from an external
editing system by using 9-pin serial control signals and
GPI signals.
Refer to the documentation of your editing system for more
information about operations on the editing system.
To set with a menu, proceed as follows.
Controllable Functions
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Enable/Safe Title.
The Enable/Safe Title menu appears.
When using 9-pin serial control signals
Following is a list of the functions which can be controlled
via the EDITOR connector on the rear panel of the
processor.
• Signal selection
• Specification of effect pattern numbers
• Specification of transition directions (normal or reverse)
• Specification of transition rates
• Execution of auto transitions
• Saving snapshots (store) and recalling snapshots
When using GPI signals
Following is a list of the main functions which can be
controlled via the GPI connector on the rear panel of the
processor.
• Auto transitions
• Cuts
• Key mix transition
• Key on and off
2
Press [Editor Port], and set it to Enable.
To use GPI signals
• Press the [GPI] button in the ENABLE/UTILITY
operation button row on the control panel, turning it on.
Alternatively, press [SWR GPI] in the Enable/Safe Title
menu, and set it to Enable.
• In the Setup/Diag >GPI >SWR GPI In menu, set the
Control From Editing Systems
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
If you need to change the assignment of signals to cross-
point buttons, do as follows.
assignments so that button numbers and pair numbers
are all the same.
Controlling External
Devices
change the signals assigned to pair numbers.
Overview
On the MFS-2000 system, you can control the following
external devices from the RS-422A 9-pin serial interface
of a Device Control Unit (DCU).
Preparations on the editing system side
Set the GPI signal pulse width to 1 field (frame) or more
depending on the video format.
• VTRs
• Disk recorders (supporting Sony Disk 9-pin protocol)
• Disk recorders (supporting the Video Disk
Communications Protocol)
• Extended VTRs (Abekas A53 protocol)
• Audio mixers (control from editing keyboard only)
To control external devices, one of the following DCU
systems is required.
MKS-2700: Six RS-422A ports (standard equipment).
MKS-8700 (with optional MKS-8702 boards installed):
Up to five boards may be installed, with each board
providing six RS-422A ports (maximum 30 ports).
To control external devices, assign them to arbitrary RS-
422A 9-pin serial interface ports.
device assignments.
Manual VTR/Disk Recorder/
Extended VTR Operations
You can perform the following operations manually.
• Select VTRs, disk recorders, and Extended VTRs
• Play
• Stop
• Perform jog and shuttle mode search
• Set start points
• Cue up devices
• Record to VTRs and disk recorders
To perform operations manually, commands must be
assigned to buttons in the utility control block.
commands to buttons in the utility control block.
To play video from a disk recorder or Extended VTR, you
need to read the files to play. To record to a disk recorder,
you need to create the files to record.
For details, see the procedure described in “Disk
146
Controlling External Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The All Stop button, as assigned in the Utility menu, also
flashes in amber when any of the devices assigned to the
Device1 to Device6 selection buttons is cued up, and
changes to lit in green when ends for all devices.
Selecting devices to control
Select devices to control by pressing the Device1 to
Device6 selection buttons in the utility control block.
You can select several devices. In this case, the device
corresponding to the button which was pressed first
becomes the reference device.
The button of the reference device lights in green. Manual
operation buttons, assigned in the utility control block,
light and go out according to the state of the reference
device.
Recording to VTRs/disk recorders/
Extended VTRs
With the Rec button held down, press the Play button (both
buttons as assigned in the Utility menu).
During recording, the Rec button lights in red and the Play
button lights in amber.
Playing VTRs/disk recorders/Extended
VTRs
Notes
• Recording is not possible to Extended VTRs.
• Recording is not possible to VTRs and disk recorders
unless they are set to Recorder.
Press the Play button, as assigned in the Utility menu.
During play, the button lights in amber.
To change the speed, set a variable speed.
• Recording start and end points cannot be set.
• To record to disk recorders using the Video Disk
Communications Protocol, set the disk recorder to
Recorder.
For more information about setting variable speeds, see
the procedure described in “Checking VTR, Disk
Notes about recording to disk recorders
• Recording is not possible unless a new file name is
assigned.
Stopping VTRs/disk recorders/Extended
VTRs
Press the Stop button, as assigned in the Utility menu.
The button lights in amber while the VTR/disk recorder/
Extended VTR is stopped.
For details, see “Creating new files (disk recorders
To stop all devices that can be selected with the Device1 to
Device6 buttons, press the button with the All Stop
assignment.
• The maximum recording time in one operation is 30
minutes.
• If recording is interrupted and restarted without
changing the file name, recording results are saved in the
same file from the point of interruption. If you want to
Conducting jog and shuttle mode search
Select jog or shuttle mode by pressing the Jog or Shuttle
button, as assigned in the Utility menu. Then control the
direction and speed of search with the joystick in the
Effect/Wipe control block.
Push the joystick to the right to search in the forward
direction, and to the left to search in the reverse direction.
To stop recording
Press the Stop button or the All Stop button (both buttons
as assigned in the Utility menu).
Checking VTR, Disk Recorder, and
Extended VTR Information
Setting start points
Press the Start TC button, as assigned in the Utility menu.
The current timecode is set as the start point. The settable
range is as follows, depending on the signal format.
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:xx (xx: frames per second
minus 1 frame)
Use the Timecode Status menu to check VTR, disk
recorder, and Extended VTR information.
To display the Timecode Status menu, select Misc>DDR/
VTR>TC Status from the top menu. When the menu
appears, the status, current timecode, start timecode, and
variable speed of each device (Device1 to Device6) appear
in the status area.
points” (page 148) for details about operation.
You can change the settings of the start point timecode and
the variable speed.
Cuing up start points
Press the Cue Up button, as assigned in the Utility menu.
While the reference device is cued up, the CUE button
flashes in amber. When the cue up ends, the button
changes to lit in green.
Controlling External Devices
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Device Status
Status
display
When the Video Disk When other devices
Communications
Protocol is used
are used
Still
–
Playing still image.
a) Displayed in red characters.
Setting start points
1
Do one of the following to select the device on which
to set the start point.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
The following information is shown in the [Status]
column.
• Turn the knob.
Status
display
When the Video Disk When other devices
Communications
Protocol is used
Knob
Description
Setting values
are used
1 (DEV)
Device number
1 to 6
XXXX
Local
Not communicating, or Communications with
communicating but the the device are being
device type cannot be carried out normally,
2
3
Press [Start TC].
The timecode window opens.
read.
but status information
is not received.
Input the desired start point timecode, then press
[Enter].
Port is not open.
The REMOTE/LOCAL
switch of the device is
set to LOCAL.
This sets the start point.
Tape Out No file loaded.
VTR: No tape loaded.
Disk recorder: No file
loaded.
To delete a start point setting
Select the device selected in step 1 and press [Start TC
CLR].
a)
Recording
–
Rec
Cue>
Cueing up in the
forward direction.
Setting variable speeds
Cue<
–
Cueing up in the
reverse direction.
1
Do one of the following to select the device on which
to set the variable speed.
Eject
Play
Stop
–
Ejecting cassette.
Playing.
Stopped.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Stopped in standby on
mode.
• Turn the knob.
Stb Off
–
Stopped in standby off
mode.
Knob
Description
Setting values
FF
–
–
–
Fast forwarding.
Rewinding.
1 (DEV)
Device number
1 to 6
Rewind
Shtl>
Searching in the
forward direction in
shuttle mode.
2
3
Turn the knob to set the variable speed.
Knob
Description
Setting values
Shtl<
–
Searching in the
reverse direction in
shuttle mode.
2 (Variable) Variable speed
–100 to +200
Press [Variable Set].
Var>
Var<
Searching in the forward direction in variable
speed mode.
The variable speed is set.
Searching in the reverse direction in variable
speed mode.
To delete a variable speed setting
Select the device selected in step 1 and press [Variable
CLR].
Jog>
Jog<
Searching in the forward direction in jog mode.
Searching in the reverse direction in jog mode.
148
Controlling External Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File
Operations
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (DEV)
Device number
1 to 6
Internally, disk recorders and Extended VTRs manage
recorded material in units of files.
When using disk recorders and Extended VTRs for
playback and recording, you need to perform the following
file operations.
Loading file lists: Before you can play a file from a disk
recorder or Extended VTR, you need to display a list
of the files stored on the device.
Loading files: With the file list visible, you need to select
a file from the list to load.
Note
File lists cannot be loaded from disk recorders which
are being used as recorders.
3
Press [List Update].
Loading of the file list starts, and a progress bar
appears in a popup window. The popup window
disappears when loading of the file list finishes
successfully. An error message appears if an error
occurs.
Creating files: To record to a disk recorder, you need to
create the file to record.
To sort file lists
Note
1
2
Press [Sort].
When using an MAV-555A/777 disk recorder to carry out
file operations, the operation mode must be set to panel
mode on the disk recorder side.
A popup window appears.
Select the sort conditions.
Loading file lists
File No: Sort by file number (smallest first).
File Name: Sort alphabetically by file name.
Date: Sort by file update date (newest first).
1
From the top menu, select Misc >DDR/VTR >File
List.
Notes
The File List menu appears. The upper part of the
status area shows the device number of the currently
selected device, and the currently loaded file. The
lower part of the status area shows the names, data
length (in timecode format), and dates of updating of
files contained in the currently loaded file list.
• File lists cannot be sorted by date when using the
Video Disk Communications Protocol.
• File lists cannot be sorted when using an Extended
VTR. (Extended VTR files are shown in register
order (1 to 99).)
This sorts the file list in the selected order.
File list sharing
You can share loaded file lists across serial ports
connected to the same disk recorder.
For more information about how to share file lists, see “To
Loading files
Proceed as follows to load a file from a file list.
Disk recorder used as player
1
2
From the top menu, select Misc >DDR/VTR >File
List.
Notes
• File update dates are not displayed for disk recorders
using the Video Disk Communications Protocol.
• File lengths and update dates are not displayed for
Extended VTRs, and register numbers are shown in
place of file names.
The File List menu appears.
Turn the knob to select the player device which has the
file you want to load.
2
Turn the knob to select a player device.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (DEV)
Device number
1 to 6
Controlling External Devices
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Do one of the following to select the file to load.
The keyboard window appears.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
4
Enter a file name and press [Enter].
The maximum file name length is as follows.
Disk recorder (Sony Disk 9-pin Protocol): 16
characters
Disk recorder (Video Disk Communications
Protocol): 8 characters
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
2 (List No)
1 and upwards
File number
b)
0 and upwards
Register number
The new file name appears at the top of the status area.
a)Disk recorder
b)Extended VTR
When the loaded file is not a target for recording
Press [File Unload].
The current file name at the top of the status area is
cleared.
Press [File Load].
The selected file is loaded, and its name appears at the
top of the status area.
Creating new files (disk recorders only)
1
From the top menu, select Misc >DDR/VTR >File
List.
The File List menu appears. The upper part of the
status area shows the device number of the currently
selected device, and the currently loaded file. The
lower part of the status area shows the currently loaded
file list.
Disk recorder set to Recorder
Note
File update dates are not displayed for disk recorders
using the Video Disk Communications Protocol.
2
3
Turn the knob to select the device on which to create
the new file.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (DEV)
Device number
1 to 6
Note
You will not be able to create a file if you select a disk
recorder that is being used as a player.
Press [New File].
150
Controlling External Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The MKS-8080/8082 operates in AUX bus mode, with
settings set to the following factory defaults.
Simple Connection to
MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus
Remote Panel
C: SET SWITCHER ID (for AUX mode)
This is set to 001, which is the station number of
the MFS-2000 control panel.
D: SET AUX DESTINATION/SOURCE (for AUX
mode)
The source is set to IN001 and following, and
destination is set to OUT001 and following.
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE (for Router mode)
This is unset, since the unit does not operate in router
mode.
N: SET PANEL TABLE (for Router mode)
The source is set to IN001 and following, and
destination is set to OUT001 and following.
However, since the unit does not operate in router
mode, these settings are not used.
You can connect the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote
Panel to enable remote control of the switcher’s AUX
buses.
To connect the MKS-8080/8082 to the control panel
requires an HKSP-R80 Routing Switcher Controller Board
or similar device constituting a primary station for an S-
Bus data link, as well as various settings for connction.
However, using a simple connection, the need for an S-Bus
data link primary station is avoided, and direct connection
to the MKS-8080/8082 is possible.
A simple connection is possible if the following conditions
are met:
R: SET ROUTE
Since when using the simple connection the switcher
and router cannot be connected in cascade, no
route setting is required, and this is unset.
O: SET AVAILABLE SOURCE/DESTINATION
The source and destination ranges are set so that the
MFS-2000 inputs and outputs can be selected.
Y: SET DISPLAY MODES
The DISPLAY MODES/PANEL FUNCTION setting
is set to NORMAL. The TALLY GROUP settings
are all set to OFF.
• There are no devices other than the MFS-2000 and
MKS-8080/8082 connected on the S-Bus data link.
• There are no more than 16 MKS-8080/8082 units
connected on the S-Bus data link.
For settings on the MKS-8080/8082, refer to “Making the
Settings With Buttons (Setup Function)” in the MKS-8080/
8082 Operation Manual.
Proceed as follows.
Z: SET PANEL STATUS
The various settings are the same as the factory default
1
2
3
Carry out initialization of the MKS-8080/8082
settings. (This can be done on the MKS-8080/8082
separately.)
settings.
Refer to “Menu Operations” in the Operation Manual of
the MKS-8080/8082 for the meaning of the above settings.
Set the MKS-8080/8082 station number in the range 2
to 17. (This can be done on the MKS-8080/8082
separately.)
Set the STATION ID switches S108 on the front panel
of the FP-141 board to 001 (1 only is set to the OFF
side).
This sets the MFS-2000 control panel as the S-Bus
data link primary station.
4
5
Use the Setup/Diag >System >Initialize menu (see
page 165) to reboot the system.
When the reboot finishes, connection to the MKS-
8080/8082 is possible.
In the Setup/Diag >System Tally >S-Bus Assign menu
(see page 182), set the position of the MFS-2000
system in the S-Bus space as follows.
• Matrix size: Standard 136 × 138
• Source, Destination, Level: 1
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Chapter
Note
After changing the signal format, input reference signal, or
screen aspect ratio settings, be sure to save the new
settings.
Basic Settings
Format Settings (Format Menu)
For details of saving settings, see “Saving Setup (Startup
Use the Format menu to set the signal format used in the
switcher system, the input reference signal (HD system
only), and the screen aspect ratio.
Setting the signal format
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System
>Format.
Note
Using an HD system requires the optional BZS-2000M.
The Format menu appears. The status area shows the
current settings (switcher settings) of the signal
format, reference video signal, and screen aspect ratio.
Signal format
The signal format is indicated by a combination of the
number of valid scan lines and the field frequency. The
signal formats with which the switcher system can be used
are as follows.
System
Valid scan lines
720p
Field frequency
HD system
59.94
50
1080i
59.94
23.976
24
1080PsF
25
29.97
59.94
50
2
Press [Format].
SD system
480i
576i
A popup window appears, showing the signal formats
that can be used in the system.
• 720P/59.94
• 1080i/50
• 1080i/59.94
Input reference signal
When using an HD system, you can select the input
reference signal from the following types.
Black Burst: SD system black burst
• 1080PsF/23.976
• 1080PsF/24
Tri Sync: HD system tri-level sync
• 1080PsF/25
• 1080PsF/29.97
• 480i/59.94
Screen aspect ratio
You can set the screen aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9.
• 576i/50
Basic Settings
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Press directly on the indication for the signal format
you want to set.
The popup window closes, and a confirmation
message appears, prompting whether or not to change
the screen aspect ratio.
The popup window closes, and a confirmation
message appears, prompting whether or not to change
the signal format.
4
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
This changes the screen aspect ratio.
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
To cancel changing the screen aspect ratio
Press [No] in the dialog box.
This changes the signal format setting, and resets the
system.
To cancel changing the signal format
Press [No] in the dialog box.
Setting the Startup Mode (Startup
Mode Menu)
Use the Startup Mode menu to set the mode for when the
devices in the switcher system are powered on.
You can select resume mode or custom mode.
Setting the input reference signal
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the previous item, “Setting the
signal format.”
Resume mode
This restores the system state at the time it was last
powered off. You can only set this for the switcher
processor and control panel.
Press [Ref Format].
A popup window appears, showing the input reference
signals that can be used in the system.
• Black Burst
Custom mode
At power on, each device is initialized to settings stored in
its own nonvolatile memory (user settings) or ROM
(factory default settings). You can make separate settings
for setup and initial status.
Setup: You can set the setup state used after powering on
to User (user settings) or Factory (factory default
settings).
Initial status: You can set the initial state (other than
setup) of each device used after powering on to User
(user settings) or Factory (factory default settings).
• Tri Sync
3
4
Press directly on the indication for input reference
signal you want to use.
The popup window closes, and a confirmation
message appears, prompting whether or not to change
the input reference signal.
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
This changes the input reference signal.
Selecting resume mode for starting up
after powering on
To cancel changing the input reference signal
format
Press [No] in the dialog box.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System
>Startup Mode.
Setting the screen aspect ratio
The Startup Mode menu appears. The status area
shows the current settings.
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the procedure “Setting the signal
Press [Screen].
A popup window appears, showing the screen aspect
ratios that can be used in the system.
• 4:3
• 16:9
3
Press directly on the indication for the screen aspect
ratio you want to use.
2
Press [Resume].
154
Basic Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The popup window in the Startup Mode menu closes,
and a confirmation message appears, prompting
whether or not to change the mode.
3
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
This changes the mode.
To cancel changing the mode
Press [No] in the dialog box.
Selecting custom mode mode for starting
up after powering on
2
Select the output port number for which you want to
make the setting.
To set setup to custom mode
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
1
Carry out step 1 in the previous item, “Selecting
resume mode for starting up after powering on.”
• Turn the knob.
2
3
If [Resume] is On, set it to Off.
Knob
Description
Setting
values
Press [Setup].
a)
1 (No)
Output port number selection
1 to 8
A popup window appears.
a) Values 5 to 8 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is
installed.
4
5
Press [User] or [Factory].
The selected output port number appears in reverse
video.
The popup window closes, and a confirmation
message appears, prompting whether or not to change
the mode.
3
Press [Out Assign].
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
This changes the mode.
A popup window appears. The assignable output
signals are shown.
To cancel changing the mode
Press [No] in the dialog box.
To set initial status to custom mode
In step 2 of the above procedure, “To set setup to custom
mode,” in place of [Setup], press [Init Status].
The remainder of the operation is the same.
Output Signal Assignment (Output
Assign Menu)
Assign output signals to each output port of the processor.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output
>Output Assign.
Assignable output signals
• M/E PGM (M/E program signal)
• M/E PVW (M/E preview signal)
The Output Assign menu appears. The status area
shows output port numbers and the output signals
assigned to each port.
• M/E Key PVW (M/E key preview signal), M/E Key
Out (M/E key output signal), or M/E PGM Clean
(M/E program clean signal): The display varies
depending on the setting of [M/E Key PVW] in the
Output Assign menu.
Basic Settings
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• PGM (program signal): final output signal including
the downstream key
valid by toggling the dedicated [SHIFT] buttons above
cross-point button rows on or off.
• PST (preset signal)
• PGM Clean (program clean signal): final output
signal excluding the downstream key
• DSK PVW (downstream key preview signal) or
DSK Key Out (downstream key output signal): The
display varies depending on the setting of [DSK
PVW] in the Output Assign menu.
Note
The dedicated [SHIFT] button does not light and does not
function when you are using the rightmost buttons in the
cross-point button rows (the 12th or 20th buttons) as
[SHIFT] buttons.
• AUX1 (auxiliary 1 signal) to AUX4
• EDIT PVW (edit preview signal)
• No Assign: no signal assigned.
For more information about how to use the rightmost
buttons as [SHIFT] buttons, see “To use the rightmost
4
Select the output signal to be assigned to the output
port selected in step 2.
Button numbers of cross-point buttons
This makes the signal assignment.
In the M/E cross-point control block, PGM/PSTcross-
point control block (using a 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide
panel), and AUX bus control block, the button numbers of
the cross-point buttons are as shown in the following
figure.
For the cross-point buttons in all control blocks, the same
signal is assigned to the same button number. The numbers
of all of these buttons differ depending on whether the
dedicated [SHIFT] button is on or off. The numbers also
differ depending on whether the rightmost buttons in
cross-point button rows are being used as [SHIFT] button
shift mode.
To the right of the output port number selected in the
status area of the Output Assign menu is shown the
name of the assigned output signal.
Note
Depending on the signal, the name shown in the popup
window and the name shown in the status area of the
Output Assign menu may be different.
Signal name
shown in the
popup window
Signal name shown in the
status area of the Output
Assign menu
M/E Key PVW
M/E Key Out
M/E PGM Clean
PGM Clean
M/E K-PVW
M/E Key
M/E PGM CLN
PGM CLN
DSK Key
DSK Key Out
Switching M/E PVW or PST output to DSK
PVW output
By pressing the DSK PVW button in the downstream key/
fade to black control block, you can temporarily switch M/
E PVW output (1 M/E panel) or PST output (1.5 M/E
panel) to DSK PVW output.
Notes
• This function is not available when [DSK PVW Btn] is
set to Disable. Press [DSK PVW Btn] to set it to Enable.
• This function is not available when DSK Key Out is
selected instead of DSK PVW.
Assigning Signals to Cross-Point
Buttons (Operation Menu)
Each cross-point button in the M/E cross-point control
block, PGM/PSTcross-point control block (using a 1.5 M/
E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel), and AUX bus control
block has two numbers. Select which of these numbers is
156
Basic Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cross-point button numbers in the M/E cross-point control block
XPT HOLD button
Dedicated SHIFT button
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
M/E
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
A
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
B
[SHIFT] Off a) : 1
[SHIFT] On b) :13
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
22
11
23
12
(SHIFT)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
(12)c) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (SHIFT
)
a) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel: 1 to 20
b) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel: 21 to 40
c) The numbers in parentheses are the button numbers when shift mode is on (set to something other than Off).
Cross-point button numbers in the PGM/PST cross-point control block
(For a 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel. See figure below for 1.5 M/E panel.)
XPT HOLD button
Dedicated SHIFT button
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
PGM/PST
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
M/E
PGM
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
M/E
c)
PST
[SHIFT] Off a) : 1
[SHIFT] On b) :13
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
22
11
23
12
(SHIFT)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
(12)d) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (SHIFT
)
a) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel, button numbers: 1 to 20
b) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel, button numbers: 21 to 40
c) The signal assignment to these buttons cannot be changed.
d) The numbers in parentheses are the button numbers when shift mode is on (set to something other than Off).
Basic Settings
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cross-point button numbers in the AUX bus control block
XPT/KY HOLD button
Dedicated SHIFT button
AUX DELEGATION
EDIT
PVW
SRC
BUS
XP/KY
HOLD
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
DSK1
AUX4
DSK2
UTIL
KEY
SHIFT
PGM
FRAME
MEM
KEY1
KEY2
CCR1
CCR2
M/E
AUX
COLOR
BKGD
BLACK
[SHIFT] Off a) : 1
[SHIFT] On b) :13
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
22
11
23
12
(SHIFT)
c)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
(12)d) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (SHIFT
)
a) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel, button numbers: 1 to 20
b) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel, button numbers: 21 to 40
c) The signal assignment to these buttons cannot be changed.
d) The numbers in parentheses are the button numbers when shift mode is on (set to something other than Off).
To use the rightmost buttons in cross-point
button rows as [SHIFT] buttons (shift mode
selection)
By a XPT Assign menu setting, you can use the rightmost
buttons on cross-point button rows (the 12th buttons on
1M/E or 1.5M/E panels, or the 20th buttons on 1.5M/E
wide panels) as [SHIFT] buttons, which switch between
cross-point button numbers.
In the XPT Assign menu, press [Shift Mode] to display a
popup window, and select a setting other than Off.
Hold: Shift-side cross-point buttons are enabled as long as
the rightmost button is held down.
cross-point buttons is done by assigning pair numbers to
cross-point button numbers.
For the operation of combining a video signal and key
signal, see “Creating a pair from a video signal and key
signal” (page 159).
Assigning signals to cross-point buttons
To carry out the assignment of a video signal and key
signal pair to a cross-point button, use the Xpt Assign
menu.
Lock: Shift-side cross-point buttons are enabled as long as
the rightmost button is on.
Off: Do not use the rightmost buttons as [SHIFT] buttons.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation
>Xpt Assign.
The Xpt Assign menu appears.
Note
The dedicated [SHIFT] button above the cross-point
button rows is disabled when you select a setting other than
Off.
Signals assigned to cross-point buttons
You can assign two signals, the video signal and key
signal, as a pair to each cross-point button number. With
this unit you can register a maximum of 40 pairs of video
and key signals. For each pair the assigned number is
referred to as a pair number. The signal assignment to
158
Basic Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The “XPT Button” (cross-point button) list appears at
the left of the status area. This list includes the
following items.
Creating a pair from a video signal and key
signal
To create a pair from a video signal and key signal to be
assigned to a cross-point button, use the Video/Key Pair
Assign menu.
No: cross-point button number
P-No: video signal and key signal pair number
Video: video signal name (source name)
Key: key signal name (source name)
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation >V/
K Pain Assign.
The “Video/Key Pair” list appears at the right of the
status area. This list includes the following items.
P-No: video signal and key signal pair number
Video: video signal name (source name) being one of
the pair
The Video/Key Pair Assign menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the cross-
point button number to which you want to assign the
signal.
• Press a cross-point button in the AUX bus control
block.
• Press directry on the “XPT Button” list in the status
area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The “Video/Key Pair” list appears at the left of the
status area. This list includes the following items.
P-No: video signal and key signal pair number
Video: video signal name (source name)
Knob
Description
Setting
values
Key: key signal name (source name)
a)
1 (Button No) Cross-point button number
selection
1 to 24
1 to 40
b)
The “Source” list appears at the right of the status area.
This list includes the following items.
No: source signal number
a) For 1 M/E panel and 1.5M/E panel
b) For 1.5 M/E wide panel
Source: source signal name
The selected number appears in reverse video.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the pair
number you want to create (or combination you want
to change).
3
4
Using any of the following methods, select the pair
number for the video signal and key signal you want to
assign to the selected cross-point button number.
• Press directry on the “Video/Key Pair” list in the
status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Press directry on the “Video/Key Pair” list in the
status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting
values
Knob
Description
Setting
values
1 (Pair No)
Pair number selection
P1 to P40
4 (Pair No)
Pair number selection
P1 to P40
The selected pair number appears in reverse video.
Press [Set] in the button area.
3
4
To set the video signal for the selected pair, press
[Video Assign] in the button area, setting it to
“Enable.”
To disable any cross-point button
You can disable a cross-point button to which a signal is
assigned so that pressing it does not select the signal.
In step 2, select the desired button number, and press
[Inhibit], turning it on.
Using any of the following methods, select the source
number to be assigned as the video signal.
• Press directry on the “Source” list in the status area.
Basic Settings
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Saving the initial status
• Turn the knobs to make the setting.
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the procedure “Saving the setup
state” (previous section).
Knob
Description
Setting
values
Press [Init Define].
4 (Source No) Source number selection
1 to 33
A confirmation message appears, prompting whether
or not to save the current state of the devices as the
initial status.
The selected source number appears in reverse video.
Press [Set] in the button area.
5
3
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
This saves the state.
In the “Video” column of the “Video/Key Pair” list,
the selected source name changes to the source name
selected in step 4.
To cancel saving
Press [No] in the dialog box.
6
7
8
To set the key signal for the selected pair, press [Key
Assign] in the button area, setting it to “Enable.”
With the same operation as in step 4, select the source
number to be assigned as the key signal.
Press [Set] in the button area.
In the “Key” column of the “Video/Key Pair” list, the
selected source name changes to the source name
selected in step 5.
Saving Setup (Startup Mode Menu)
Using the Startup Mode menu, you save the setup state of
the devices constituting the switcher system and the initial
status after powering on in the nonvolatile memory of each
device.
Saving the setup state
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System
>Startup Mode.
The Startup Mode menu appears. The status area
shows the current settings (see page 154)
2
3
Press [Setup Define].
A confirmation message appears, prompting whether
or not to save the current setup state.
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
This saves the state.
To cancel saving
Press [No] in the dialog box.
160
Basic Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying Detail Information (Detail
Information Menu)
Installing Software
To check the detail information for an application shown
in the Version Information menu, use the Detail
Information menu.
To display the Detail Information menu, from the top
menu, select Setup/Diag >Info/Install >Detail Info.
This section describes how to install the software
constituting the MFS-2000 system.
To install software, use the Info/Install menu. In the Info/
Install menu, you can check the software version, or enter
an installation key for each device.
Displaying Version Information
(Version Information Menu)
To check the version of the application software (referred
to as “applications”) currently installed in the devices
constituting the MFS-2000 system, use the Version
Information menu.
To display the Version Information menu, from the top
menu, select Setup/Diag >Info/Install >Version Info.
The abbreviation for the currently selected application
appears on the [Target] button. The status area shows the
name and version of the software/firmware constituting
the currently selected application.
Note
No detail information is shown for applications not
communicating with the menu application and
applications for which version information was not
available.
The status area shows abbreviations for the applications
and the version numbers.
If there are no communications with an application in the
menu, the application box is grayed out. If the version
information is not available, the [Version] box is left
blank.
To change the application for which detail
information is displayed
Press the [Target] button.
When the popup window appears, press the button for the
application for which you want to view the detail
information.
The button names are the same as the application
Abbreviations for applications
Abbreviation
SWR
Name
Switcher
DME
Manually Installing Software (Manual
Install Menu)
DME
PNL
Control panel
Menu
To install only the required software/firmware manually,
use the Manual Install menu. Insert a “Memory Stick” on
which the software has already been written.
MENU
DCU
DCU
Note
Version information display
The version information is shown as follows.
V + version number + (Date)
E.g. V1.00 (Jul.01.2004)
Install the DCU software separately from other software.
For details of software installation, refer to “Installing
Software” in the Appendix (separate document).
Version number: V1.00
Last updated: July 1, 2004
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Info/Install
>Manual Install.
Installing Software
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Manual Install menu appears.
Press [Refresh].
Note
Never power off during the installation. If you power
off during the installation, the particular device may
not be able to be restarted.
2
This loads the data from the “Memory Stick,” and the
status area shows the abbreviation for each
application, and the version, name, and install settings
([On]/[Off]) for the software/firmware constituting the
application. If there are no communications with an
application in the menu, the application box is grayed
out.
To cancel the installation
Press [No] in the dialog box.
If you have pressed [Yes] to begin the installation,
press [Cancel] in the progress bar.
If an error occurs
A message appears, indicating what the error is.
Check the message, and press [OK] to close the
message dialog box.
When the installation finishes, the indication in the
[Install] column changes as follows.
If the installation completes normally: [OK]
appears.
If an error occurred: [Error] appears.
Entering an Installation Key (License
Menu)
If there is no data for an application to be installed
in the “Memory Stick”
A dialog box appears.
Press [OK] to close the dialog box.
To use software options (referred to as “options”),
installation keys are required. An installation key is a
password (16 alphanumeric characters) issued for each
option of each application. In the MFS-2000 system,
installation keys are issued for the following options.
3
4
Select the software/firmware.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Application
Model number
Product name
SWR (switcher)
BZS-2000M
Switcher Upgrade
Software (Multi)
• Turn the knob.
BZS-2440M
Frame Memory
Upgrade Software
(Multi)
Knob
Setting
Values
a)
1 (No)
Software/firmware
selection
1 and upwards
DME
BZS-2470M
BZS-8050
DME Upgrade
Software (Multi)
a) The maximum value depends on application.
PNL (control
panel)
Editing Control
Software
Press [Install], turning it on, to install the software/
firmware selected in step 3, or turnint it off, not to
install.
To activate an option you want to use, you need to enter the
installation key in the License menu.
To purchase an installation key requires the device ID
(string of up to 17 alphanumeric characters). You can
check the device ID in the License menu.
5
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4.
Press [Execute].
A confirmation message appears, prompting whether
or not to carry out the installation.
For details of purchasing an installation key, contact your
Sony sales representative.
7
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
Checking the unique device ID
This installs the software/firmware for which [On] is
set.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Info/Install
>Licence.
The License menu appears.
162
Installing Software
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the installation key is incorrect: a message
appears, indicating that the installation key is
incorrect. Press [OK] in the dialog box, go back to
step 3, and re-enter the installation key.
5
Using either of the following methods, restart the
system.
• In the Setup/Diag >System >Initialize menu, press
[Reset].
• Exit the menu system, power the control panel off
and then power it on again.
The abbreviation for the currently selected application
appears on the [Target] button. The status area shows the
device ID (Unique Device ID) for the currently selected
application, and the model number, product name, and
current state ([Active] or blank) of each of the options
available. Unsupported option columns are grayed out.
Note
Be sure to exit the menu system before powering the
control panel off. (On how to exit the menu system, see
After the restart, when you display the License menu,
for the activated option, the [Condition] column shows
[Active].
To change the application for which device ID
and option information is displayed
Press [Target].
When the popup window appears, press the button for the
application for which you want to view the information.
The button names are the same as the application
To deactivate an option
1
Referring to steps 1 and 2 of “Entering an installation
key to activate an option,” select the option you want
to deactivate.
2
Press [Deactivate].
Entering an installation key to activate an
option
A confirmation message appears, prompting whether
to deactivate the option.
1
Referring to the previous item “Checking the device
ID,” display the License menu for the application for
which you want to activate an option.
3
4
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
A message appears, indicating that after a restart the
option will be deactivated.
2
Select the option you want to use.
To cancel deactivating the option
Press [No] in the dialog box.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Press [OK] in the dialog box, restart the system.
• Turn the knob.
After the restart, when you display the License menu,
for the deactivated option, the [Condition] column is
blank.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (No)
Selection of option
you want to use
1 and upwards
a) The maximum value depends on application.
3
4
Press [Activate].
A keyboard window appears.
Enter the installation key.
If the installation key is correct: a message appears,
indicating that the option will be activated by
carrying out a restart. Press [OK] in the dialog box,
and proceed to step 5.
Installing Software
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Maintenance (Panel Menu)
Other Settings
Use the Panel menu to make the following settings related
to the control panel.
• Brightness of LCD backlights
• Screen saver
• Beep on and off
• Touch panel calibration
• Hard disk formatting (only after a failure)
Setting the Date and Time (Date/
Time Menu)
Use the Date/Time menu to set the date and time used by
the system.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Maintenance
>Panel.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Maintenance
>Date/Time.
The Panel menu appears. The status area shows the
current settings of each item (except for calibration
and HDD format).
The Date/Time menu appears. The status area shows
the current date and time in the [Current] line, and the
date and time to set in the [Set] line. Immediately after
the menu appears, both lines contain the same date and
time.
2
Press the button corresponding to the item you want to
set, and set as described in the following sections.
LCD Bright: Brightness of the LCD buttons in the
Flexi Pad control block
Scrn Saver: Screen saver on and off
Touch Beep: On and off of beep sounds for touch
panel menu operations
Calibration: Calibration of touch panel
HDD Format: Initialization of hard disk (only after
failure)
2
3
Press [Date].
Turn the knobs to change the date in the [Set] line.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 to 12
1 (Month) Month
2 (Day)
3 (Year)
Day
1 to 31
Year
2004 to 2037
To adjust the brightness of LCDs
Set by turning knob 1.
4
5
Press [Time].
Turn the knobs to change the time in the [Set] line.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Bright) Brightness.
1 to 5
Knob
Description
Hour
Setting values
0 to 23
To make screen saver settings
Press [Scrn Saver], turning it on or off, to turn the screen
saver on and off.
1 (Hour)
2 (Min)
3 (Sec)
Minute
0 to 59
Second
0 to 59
When the screen saver is on, turn knob 1 to set the time
until it activates.
6
Press [Set].
Knob
Description
Setting values
The date and time in the [Set] line appear in the
[Current] line.
1 (Wait)
Time (minutes) until screen
saver activates.
1 to 300
164
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The System Adjust menu appears. The status area
shows the current settings.
To turn beep sounds on and off
Press [Touch Beep], turning it on or off.
To calibrate the touch panel
If touches on the touch panel do not select the desired
menu items, you can use the following procedure to
calibrate the touch panel.
1
Press [Calibration].
The following message appears.
“To perform calibration, please touch the center of
each plus sign.”
2
3
Press [Sys Phase].
2
3
Press [Yes].
Turn the knobs to adjust the phase.
Press the center of the [+] mark on the screen.
The [+] mark that you pressed disappears, and another
[+] mark appears on the diagonally opposite side.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (System Phase) System phase –32.00 to +96.00
setting
4
Press the center of the [+] mark.
Setting the operation switching timing
A confirmation message appears.
Press [Yes] in the message dialog to confirm the
calibration. Press [No] to cancel the calibration and
return to the Maintenance menu.
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the previous item, “Adjusting the
system phase.”
To format the hard disk
Use [HDD Format] to format the hard disk. Do this only
when one of the following errors has occurred.
Press [Sw Timing].
A popup window appears.
Error display
Error description
3
Select one of the following.
Internal Error: Data HDD Data on the internal hard disk is
corrupt.
Any: Switch on the earliest field that can be processed.
Field 1: Switch on field 1.
Field 2: Switch on field 2.
Internal Error: HDD
Format
The internal hard disk is not
formatted, or hard disk partitions
cannot be recognized.
Setting the illegal color limiter
When you press [HDD Format], a confirmation message
appears asking if you really want to format the hard disk.
Press [Yes] in the message dialog to execute the format.
Press [No] to cancel the format.
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the procedure “Adjusting the
system phase”.
Press [Color Limiter], to switch the illegal color
limiter on or off.
System Adjustments (System Adjust
Menu)
System Reset and Memory
Initialization (Initialize Menu)
Use the System Adjust menu to carry out system phase
adjustments, operation switching timing settings, and
illegal color adjustments.
Use the Initialize menu to carry out a system reset or
memory initialization.
When you carry out a system reset, the system is restarted
memory initialization returns to the factory default
settings.
Adjusting the system phase
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System
>System Adjust.
Other Settings
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mode in which the sync signal included in an output
signal is not replaced by an internally generated sync
signal, but is left unchanged.
Resetting the whole system
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System
>Initialize.
Video process: Adjusts the input signal luminance and
hue.
The Initialize menu appears.
Carrying out phase adjustments and
through mode setting
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output
>Input Adjust.
The Input Adjust menu appears. The status area shows
the input number, signal phase, and through mode
setting.
2
3
Press [Reset].
The popup window closes, and a confirmation
message appears, prompting whether or not to reset.
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
This resets the system.
To cancel the reset
Press [No] in the dialog box.
2
Select the input number for which you want to make
the setting.
Initializing memory
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the previous item, “Resetting the
whole system.”
• Turn the knob.
Press [All Clear].
Knob
Description
Setting
values
The popup window closes, and a confirmation
message appears, prompting whether or not to carry
out the memory initialization.
a)
1 (Input)
Input number selection
1 to 16
a) Values 9 to 16 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is
installed.
3
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.
The selected input number appears in reverse video.
This initializes memory, and resets the system.
3
4
To adjust the phase, press [Input Phase], and turn the
knobs to adjust the parameters.
To cancel memory initialization
Press [No] in the dialog box.
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Input Phase)
Phase
–16 to +16
Input Signal Setup (Input/Output
Menu)
To carry out the through mode setting, press [Thru
Mode], toggling it between Enable and Disable.
Use the Input/Output menu to carry out setup relating to
processor primary input signals.
You can make the following settings.
Phase: Adjust the phase of the primary input signals.
Through mode: For each primary input, select whether
the through mode is on or off. The through mode is a
Enable: Enable the through mode.
Disable: Disable the through mode.
166
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
Parameter group 2/2
Description Setting values
To make through mode effective, it is also necessary to
set output side through mode to “Enable” (see page
Knob
2 (Video Gain) Overall gain of –200.00 to +200.00
the video signal
3 (C Gain)
Chrominance
signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
Making the video process setting
4 (Hue Delay)
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output
>Video Process.
Output Signal Setup (Input/Output
Menu)
The Video Process menu appears. The status area
shows the input numbers, and video processing
adjustment values.
Use the Input/Output menu to carry out setup relating to
output signals.
You can make the following settings.
Output signal assignment: Assign an output signal to
Video clip: For each output port, adjust the output signal
clip levels (White Clip, Dark Clip, Chroma Clip).
Vertical blanking width: For each output port, adjust the
vertical blanking width of the output signal. The
adjustment value indicates the position of the line up
to which masking takes place, relative to the blanking
width of field 1 of the video format.
Through mode: For each output port, set whether the
through mode is on or off. The through mode is a mode
in which the sync signal included in an output signal is
not replaced by an internally generated sync signal, but
is left unchanged.
Crop: When the screen aspect ratio in an HD system is
4:3, set how the output image is reduced to 4:3.
Safe title: Select safe title markers for each output port.
Reference output: Adjust the reference output phase with
respect to the reference input phase, as a number of
lines and a time.
2
Select the input number for which you want to make
the setting.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The parameter assignment to knob 1 is the same in
parameter groups 1/2 and 2/2.
Knob
Description
Setting
values
a)
1 (Input)
Input number selection
1 to 16
Video clip adjustment
a) Values 9 to 16 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is
installed.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output
>Output Clip.
The selected input number appears in reverse video.
Press [Video Proc], turning it on.
The Output Clip menu appears. The status area shows
the output port numbers, and the output signal
assigned to each port, and the white clip, dark clip, and
chrominance clip values.
3
4
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameters.
Parameter group 1/2
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Video Gain) Overall gain of –200.00 to +200.00
the video signal
3 (Y Gain)
Y signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
–7.31 to +109.59
4 (Black Level) Black level
Other Settings
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Select the output port number for which you want to
make the setting.
2
Select the output port number for which you want to
make the setting.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description
Setting
values
Knob
Description
Setting
values
a)
a)
1 (No)
Output port number selection
1 (No)
Output port number selection
1 to 8
1 to 8
a) Values 5 to 8 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is
installed.
a) Values 5 to 8 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is
installed.
The selected output port number appears in reverse
video.
The selected output port number appears in reverse
video.
3
4
Press [Output Clip].
3
4
Press [V Blank].
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameters.
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameters.
Knob
Description
Setting
values
Knob
Description
Setting
values
a)
2 (White)
3 (Dark)
Luminance signal white clip
value
90.00 to
109.02
2 (Mask End) Last line of vertical
blanking interval
10 to 19
b)
6 to 22
7 to 20
7 to 25
c)
d)
Luminance signal dark clip
value
–6.85 to
+10.00
4 (Chroma) Chrominance signal clip
value
90.00 to
113.17
a) When signal format is 480i/59.94
b) When signal format is 576i/50
c) For any signal format with valid scan lines of 1080i or 1080PsF
d) When signal format is 720p/59.94
To reset the settings to the default values
Press [Default]. All parameters, White, Dark, and
Chroma for the output signal currently being set are
returned to their default values.
To reset the settings to the default values
Press [Default].
5
To carry out the through mode setting, press [Thru
Mode], toggling it between Enable and Disable.
Making vertical blanking width and
through mode settings
Enable: Enable the through mode.
Disable: Disable the through mode.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output
>V Blank/Through.
Notes
The V Blank/Through menu appears. The status area
shows the output port numbers, and for each port the
assigned output signal, vertical blanking width, and
through mode setting.
• The through mode setting can only be made for the
following output signals.
168
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M/E PGM, PGM, PGM Clean, AUX1 to AUX4, and
Edit PVW
Setting the reference output
• To make through mode effective, it is also necessary
to set input side through mode to “Enable” (see page
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output
>Ref Out.
The Reference Out menu appears. The status area
shows the reference output phase parameters (Line,
Time).
In an HD system, to crop the image in 4:3
mode
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output
>Output Crop.
The Output Crop menu appears. The status area shows
the output port numbers, and for each port the assigned
output signal, and 4:3 crop mode setting.
2
3
Press [Phase].
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameters.
Knob
Description
Number of lines
Time
Setting values
–90 to +90
1 (Line)
2 (Time)
–32.00 to +96.00
2
Select the output port number for which you want to
make the setting.
Making safe title settings
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
This procedure allows you to set up safe title output. To
actually execute safe title output, you need to turn on safe
title output in the Enable/Safe Title menu.
• Turn the knob.
For details about operation, see “Safe Title” (page 134).
Knob
Description
Setting
values
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output
>Safe Title.
a)
1 (No)
Output port number selection
1 to 8
a) Values 5 to 8 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is
installed.
The Safe Title menu appears. The status area shows
the output port numbers, the output signal assigned to
each port, and the markers set for each port.
The selected output port number appears in reverse
video.
3
Press [4:3 Crop].
This toggles the 4:3 crop mode on and off, and the [4:3
Crop] column in the status area shows the setting as
follows.
Indication when enabled: On
Indication when disabled: blank
Note
When the HD system screen aspect ratio is set to 16:9
(see page 154) in the Setup/Diag >Format menu or
when your system is set to an SD format (see page
153), it is not possible to enable the 4:3 crop mode.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the output
port number for which you want to make the setting.
Other Settings
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
The Utility menu appears. The “Assign” list of
currently assigned utility commands appears at the left
of the status area. The “Utility Command” list of all
assignable utility commands appears at the right of the
status area.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Description
Setting values
a)
1 (No) Output port number selection
The status area displays abbreviated utility command
names. See the next section “Utility command list” for
a list of these abbreviated names.
1 to 8
a) Setting values 5 to 8 are valid only when the MKS-2110M (option)
is installed.
The selected output port number appears in reverse
video.
3
Press the button for the marker that you want to set
(multiple selections possible).
Box1: Box marker 1
Box2: Box marker 2 (adjustable luminance)
Cross: Cross marker
If you select Box1 or Box2, a popup window opens so
that you can select the aspect ratio. You can also set the
aspect ratio by turning the knobs. If you select Cross,
the cross marker is turned on.
2
3
Press [Block Sel].
A popup window appears.
To select the aspect ratio
In the popup window, press the button for the aspect ratio
that you want.
• 16:9
Select the group of operation buttons to which you
want to assign a utility command.
• 14:9
• 4:3
Device/Utility: DEVICE/UTILITY operation buttons
Enable/Utility: ENABLE/UTILITY operation
buttons
To set other marker parameters
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
4
In the “Assign” list, select the button to which you
want to assign the command.
• When Box1 was selected:
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Size)
Size of box
50.00 to 100.00
• Turn the knob.
• When Box2 was selected:
Knob
Description
Setting values
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (No) Button number selection
1 to 9
2 (Size)
Size of box
50.00 to 100.00
b)
1 to 4
3 (Luminance) Luminance of displayed 0.00 to 100.00
color
a) When Device/Utility is selected
b) Enable/Utility is selected
Utility Settings (Utility Menu)
5
In the “Utility Command” list, do any of the following
to select the command to assign to the selected button.
You can assign utility commands to the buttons in the
utility control block.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Assigning utility commands
• Turn the knobs.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation
>Utility.
170
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knob
Description
Setting values
3 (Command) Utility command
selection
1 and upwards
4 (GPI No) a) GPI number
selection
1 to 16
a) Knob 3 appears only when SWR GPI ? Test Fire is selected.
6
Press [Set].
To clear a utility command assignment
Select a button by performing step 4, and press [Clear].
Other Settings
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utility command list
The status area displays the following abbreviated names
of utility commands.
Command name
Function of command button
Button state
a)
Not lit
Lit
Editor Enbl
Enable and disable the switcher editor port.
Enable and disable all switcher GPI input ports.
Enable and disable all control panel GPI input ports.
Enable
Disable
SWR GPI Enbl
Panel GPI Enbl
Safe Title
Switch between output (On) and no output (off) of safe title
markers.
On
Off
FM V Frame Freeze Switch between frame-unit capture of video to frame memory
(On) and no capture (Off).
FM V Field Freeze Switch between field-unit capture of video to frame memory
(On) and no capture (Off).
FM V Freeze Off
Switch between disable freeze capture of video to frame
memory (On) and enable freeze capture (Off).
FM K Frame Freeze Switch between frame-unit capture of key to frame memory
(On) and no capture (Off).
FM K Field Freeze Switch between field-unit capture of key to frame memory
(On) and no capture (Off).
FM K Freeze Off
Switch between disable freeze capture of key to frame
memory (On) and enable freeze capture (Off).
SWR GPI ? Test
Fire
Execute test trigger output on the selected GPI output port. Flashes during test
fire execution
–
b)
Mcro Only Set
Set macro attachment mode to Macro Only.
On
Off
Mcro AT with Rate
Save transition rate when registering a macro event, and
apply it as the transition rate when executing the event (only
when registering auto transition, key auto transition, or fade
to black).
Mcro AT with A/B
Save A/B Bus cross-point settings when registering a macro
event, and apply them as A/B Bus cross-point settings when
executing the event (only when registering auto transitions).
Device 1 to Device Select devices to control. When several devices are
Selection (lights in
green for reference
device)
De-selection
6
selected, the button pressed first selects the reference
device.
Play
Execute play by the selected device, or when pressed
together with the Rec button, execute recording by the
selected device.
Executing play or
recording
Play or recording
over or stopped
Stop
Stop play, recording, or cue up by the selected device
Play, recording, or
cue up is over or
stopped
Executing play,
recording, or cue
up, or executing jog
or shuttle search
All Stop
Stop play, recording, or cue up by all devices.
Executing: Flashes
once
–
Cued up: Flashes in
amber
Cue up over: Lights
in green
Cue Up
Cue up the selected device. When several devices are
selected, the button lights in green when the reference
device finishes cue up.
Executing: Flashes Stopped
Execution over:
Lights in green
Start TC
Set the timecode of the point where the button is pressed as Flashes during
the start timecode of the selected device. execution (beep also
output)
–
172
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command name
Function of command button
Button state
a)
Not lit
Lit
Rec
When pressed together with the Play button, execute
recording on the selected device.
Lights in red during
execution.
Recording over or
stopped
Shuttle
Turn shuttle mode on or off.
Turn jog mode on or off.
On
Off
Jog
PVW Select M/E
Switch Edit PVW output to M/E PVW output. (Goes off
automatically when other operation disables this command.)
PVW Select PST
Auto PVW
Switch Edit PVW output to PST output. (Goes off
automatically when other operation disables this command.)
Turn auto preview on and off. When auto preview is on, Edit On (lit in green)
PVW output switches as follows.
Off
Button with PVW Select M/E assignment is on: If M/E
PGM is on-air, switch Edit PVW output to M/E PVW
output. If M/E PGM is not on-air, switch Edit PVW output
to M/E PGM output.
Button with PVW Select PST assignment is on: If M/E
PGM is selected on both PGM bus and PST bus, switch
Edit PVW output to M/E PVW output. If signal other than
M/E PGM is selected on either PGM bus or PST bus,
switch Edit PVW output to PST output.
a) Unless otherwise specified, lit in amber
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Key Setup (Key Menu)
Use the Key menu to make settings related to keys, such as
key memory and the show key function.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
Selecting the key memory operating mode
1 (Key)
Key selection
1, 2
a) 1: Key1, 2
2: DSK1, 2 (1.5 M/E panel only)
information about key memory.
3
4
Press [Key Memory].
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation
>Key.
A popup window appears.
The Key menu appears. The current key and key
memory operating mode, key bus cross-point hold
mode, and mask/border processing order settings
appear in the status area.
Select the key memory operating mode.
• Simple
• Full
• Off
Setting the key bus cross-point hold mode
You can set the operating mode of the key bus [XP/KY
HOLD] button in the AUX bus control block.
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of “Selecting the key memory
operating mode”.
Press [XP/KY Hold].
A popup window appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the target
key.
3
Select the cross-point hold mode.
Other Settings
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key Disable: The key bus [XP/KY HOLD] button
functions as a key disable button. When a snapshot
is loaded with the [XP/KY HOLD] button on, key
setting data in the snapshot (including cross-point
selection data) is ignored.
Key Disable with Status: This is the same function as
[Key Disable], but additionally key on/off status
data is ignored.
Xpt Hold: The key bus [XP/KY HOLD] button
functions as a cross-point hold button. When a
snapshot is loaded with the [XP/KY HOLD]
button on, cross-point selection data is ignored.
Settings Relating to Video Switching
(Transition Menu)
For settings relating to video switching, use the Transition
menu.
The Transition menu has the following items.
Bus Toggle: For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks,
switch the bus toggle on or off.
PST Color Mix: For each of the M/E and PGM/PST
banks, set the stroke mode for a preset color mix and
the mode in which the transition type after a transition
ends returns to the previous setting.
FTB: Enable or disable fade-to-black for each final
program output.
Fader Curve: Set the relationship when carrying out a
transition, between the fader lever position and the
advancement state of the transition.
Setting mask and border processing order
You can invert the order in which mask and border effects
are processed when you apply a mask.
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of “Selecting the key memory
Setting the Bus Toggle On or Off
Press [Msk/Bdr Proc].
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation
>Transition.
A popup window appears.
The Transition menu appears.
3
Select one of the following.
The status area and button area show the bus toggle,
preset color mix, fade-to-black, and fader curve
settings.
Mask t Border: Mask effect is applied first, then
Border effect.
Border t Mask: Border effect is applied first, then
Mask effect.
Making show key settings
Enable and disable the show key function, and set the show
key output hold interval.
information about show key.
1
2
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation
>Key.
2
3
When the control panel is a 1.5 M/E panel, select the
bank to which the settings apply.
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Note
Show key cannot be set individually for Key1 and 2,
and DSK1 and 2.
• Turn the knob.
Press [Show Key] to enable show key output, and turn
knob 2 to set the show key output hold time.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Bank) M/E or P/P selection to
which settings apply
1, 2
Knob
Description
Setting values
The selected bank appears in reverse video.
2 (Hold Time) Show key output hold 0 to 999
time (frames)
Press [Bus Toggle] to switch between on and off.
On: Flip-flop mode
Off: Bus fixed mode
174
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enable: Each time a transition ends, the transition
type returns to the immediately previous setting.
(When a transition ends, the [PST COLOR MIX]
button goes off.)
Disable: Even when a transition ends, the preset color
mix remains selected. (The [PST COLOR MIX]
button remains lit when the transition ends.)
Note
When using the BZS-8050, select flip-flop mode (set
Bus Toggle to On).
Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode
The following describes the difference between flip-flop
mode and bus fixed mode, taking an M/E bank as an
example; the functionality is the same, however, on the
PGM/PST bank.
Normally, when a background transition is carried out on
the M/E bank, the signals selected on the A and B rows of
cross-point buttons are interchanged at the end of the
transition. That is to say, except during a transition, the
background output is always from the background A bus.
This is called “flip-flop mode.”
Enabling or Disabling the Fade-to-Black
Function
You can set this so that no fade-to-black occurs, even when
you press the [FTB] button in the downstream key/fade to
black control block.
1
2
The alternative is known as “bus fixed mode,” in which
there is no bus interchange. In this mode, when the fader
lever is at the top of its travel the output from the A bus is
always 100%, and when the fader lever is at the bottom of
its travel the output from the B bus is 100%.
Press [FTB] to toggle between Enable and Disable.
Enable: When the [FTB] button is pressed, a fade-to-
black is carried out.
Disable: Even when the [FTB] button is pressed, no
fade-to-black is carried out.
Setting a Preset Color Mix
In a normal preset color mix, in the first transition, a single
color matte is gradually mixed into the current image, and
in the second transition the new image is gradually mixed
into the color matte. In the preset color mix settings, if you
select “one-stroke mode,” these two operations are
combined into a single transition operation.
With the “one-time mode” enabled, when a preset color
mix is completed, the transition type always returns to the
immediately previous setting. To set a preset color mix,
use the following procedure.
Settings Relating to Fader Lever
Operations
To select the way in which the fader lever position and the
transition progress are related, use the following
procedure.
1
2
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 2 in the previous item, “Setting
the Bus Toggle On or Off.”
Press [Fader Curve].
A popup window appears.
Press [Stroke Mode].
3
Select the fader lever operation mode.
A popup window appears.
Normal: The transition progress is linear, according to
the fader lever position.
Advanced Tally Mode: When the fader lever is
moved from the end of its travel, the tally is output
slightly before the transition starts.
3
4
Select whether to carry out a transition in one stroke or
two strokes.
2 Stroke: Carry out a preset color mix with two
transition operations.
1 Stroke: Carry out a preset color mix with a single
transition operation.
Macro Execution Mode Settings
(Macro Menu)
Note
When the bus toggle mode is off (bus fixed mode), a
preset color mix is always in “one-stroke mode.”
Use the Macro menu to select the macro execution mode.
For more information about macros, see “Macros” (page
If each time a transition ends the transition type is to
return to the previous setting, press [One Time],
turning it to Enable.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation
>Macro.
Other Settings
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Macro menu appears.
Setting switcher GPI inputs
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >SWR
GPI In.
The SWR GPI Input menu appears. The status area
shows the GPI input ports, and the trigger type and
action set for the signal to be input to each port.
2
3
Press [Exec Mode].
A popup window appears.
Select the macro execution mode.
Normal: Execution of the next event starts
automatically when a macro event finishes
executing.
Step: Execution pauses when a macro event finishes
executing.
2
Select the port for which you want to make the setting.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knobs. (E.g.: if the setting by knob 1 is
value 5 and the setting by knob 2 is value 1, this is
shown as 5-1.)
GPI Input/Output Setup (GPI Menu)
Use the GPI menu to set up GPI signal inputs and outputs
between the switcher, control panel or DCU (MKS-8700/
2700) and external devices.
Knob
Description
Setting
values
1 (Port)
2 (No)
GPI input port number selection 1 to 8
To enable GPI input to the switcher or control
panel
You need to enable GPI input before you can use GPI input
signals. Do this in the Enable/Safe Title menu.
Number selection to which action 1 to 8
is to be assigned
To change the trigger type setting
Press [Trigger Type], to display a popup window, and
select the trigger type.
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Enable/Safe Title.
The Enable/Safe Title menu appears.
(falling edge): Trigger is applied on the falling edge
pulse.
of an input
(rising edge): Trigger is applied on the rising edge
pulse.
of an input
(both edges): Trigger is applied on both falling and
rising edges
of an input pulse.
Disable (disabled): Input pulses are ignored.
To change the action setting
Press [Action], to display a popup window, and select the
action.
Action button
M/E Auto Trans
M/E Cut
Status area display
M/E AT
2
Press the button for the type of GPI input to enable.
M/E Cut
To enable GPI input to the control panel: Press
[Panel GPI], setting it to [Enable].
a)
P/P AT
P/P Auto Trans
To enable GPI input to the switcher: Press [SWR
GPI], setting it to [Enable].
a)
P/P Cut
P/P Cut
M/E Key1 Auto Trans M/E K1 AT
176
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Action button
Status area display
Knob
Description
Setting
values
M/E Key1 Cut
M/E K1 Cut
a)
M/E Key2 Auto Trans M/E K2 AT
1 (Port)
GPI output port number
selection
1 to 16
M/E Key2 Cut
DSK1 Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut
M/E K2 Cut
DSK1 AT
DSK1 Cut
DSK2 AT
DSK2 Cut
FTB AT
a) Select 1 to 8 for GPI ports (G-1 to G-8), and 9 to 16 for tally ports
(T1 to T8).
To change the trigger type setting
Press [Trigger Type], to display a popup window, and
select the trigger type.
DSK2 Auto Trans
DSK2 Cut
FTB Auto Trans
FTB Cut
(falling edge): The trigger closes the relay contacts
or causes a low output level, and this state is
maintained for the specified pulse width.
(rising edge): The trigger opens the relay contacts or
causes a high output level, and this state is maintained
for the specified pulse width.
FTB Cut
b)
Snapshot
Snapshot Recall ?
No Action
No Action
FM V Field
FM V Field Freeze
(both edges): Each time the trigger is activated, the
relay switches between open/closed or the output level
switches between high/low.
FM V Frame
FM V Off
FM V Frame Freeze
FM V Freeze Off
Status: Depending on the state, the relay is switched open/
closed or the output level is switched high/low.
Disable (disabled): No output.
FM K Field
FM K Frame
FM K Off
FM K Field Freeze
FM K Frame Freeze
FM K Freeze Off
To change the timing setting
When the trigger type is other than [Status] or [Disable],
press [Timing] to display a popup window, and select the
timing.
a) 1.5 M/E panel only
b) When [Snapshot Recall ?] is selected, press [Register No] to set a register
number (1 to 99).
Any: Output on the earliest field that can be processed.
Field 1: Output on field 1.
Field 2: Output on field 2.
Setting switcher GPI outputs
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >SWR
GPI Out.
Note
When the following signal formats are selected, it is not
possible to set the timing.
• 1080PsF/23.976
• 1080PsF/24
• 1080PsF/25
The SWR GPI Output menu appears. The status area
shows the GPI output ports, and the trigger type,
output timing, pulse width, and action set for the signal
to be output from each port.
• 1080PsF/29.97
• 720p/59.94
To change the pulse width setting
When the trigger type is
(falling edge) or
(rising edge), turn the knobs to set the pulse width.
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Pulse Width)
Pulse width
1 to 60 (fields)
To change the action setting
Press [Action] to display a popup window, and select the
action.
2
Select the port for which you want to make the setting.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Action button
M/E Auto Trans
M/E Cut
Status area display
M/E AT
M/E Cut
• Turn the knob.
a)
P/P AT
P/P Auto Trans
Other Settings
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Panel GPI Input menu appears. The status area
shows the GPI input ports, and the trigger type and
action set for the signal to be input to each port.
Action button
Status area display
a)
P/P Cut
P/P Cut
M/E Key1 Auto Trans M/E K1 AT
M/E Key1 Cut M/E K1 Cut
M/E Key2 Auto Trans M/E K2 AT
M/E Key2 Cut
DSK1 Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut
M/E K2 Cut
DSK1 AT
DSK1 Cut
DSK2 AT
DSK2 Cut
FTB AT
FTB Cut
M/E K1 On
M/E K2 On
DSK1 On
DSK2 On
Error
DSK2 Auto Trans
DSK2 Cut
FTB Auto Trans
FTB Cut
M/E Key1 On
M/E Key2 On
DSK1 On
2
Select the port for which you want to make the setting.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
DSK2 On
• Turn the knob.
Error
Tally Input1
Tally Input2
Tally Input3
Tally Input4
Tally Input5
Tally Input6
Tally Input7
Tally Input8
Tally Input9
Tally Input10
Tally Input11
Tally Input12
Tally Input13
Tally Input14
Tally Input15
Tally Input16
Tally M/E
Tally 1
Knob
Description
Setting
values
Tally 2
1 (Port) GPI input port number selection 1 to 8
Tally 3
Tally 4
To change the trigger type setting
Press [Trigger Type], to display a popup window, and
select the trigger type.
Tally 5
Tally 6
Tally 7
(falling edge): Trigger is applied on the falling edge
of an input pulse.
(rising edge): Trigger is applied on the rising edge
of an input pulse.
(both edges): Trigger is applied on both falling and
Tally 8
Tally 9
Tally 10
Tally 11
Tally 12
Tally 13
Tally 14
Tally 15
Tally 16
Tally M/E
No Action
rising edges of an input pulse.
Level: Trigger is applied when input is low level or high
level.
Disable (disabled): Input pulses are ignored.
To change the action setting
When the trigger type is other than [Level] and [Disable],
press [Action] to display a popup window, then you can
select the following actions.
No Action
Note
a) 1.5 M/E panel only
If you change the trigger type setting from any of falling
edge, rising edge, and both edges to [Level], or vice versa,
the action is automatically changed to [No Action].
To test fire the trigger output
Select the output port, and press [Test Fire].
Note
For details of the action when the trigger type is set to
[Level], see the next item, “Setting the action when the
trigger type is [Level].”
When the selected output port trigger type is [Status], no
trigger is output.
Setting control panel GPI inputs
Action button
M/E Auto Trans
M/E Cut
Status area display
M/E AT
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >Panel
GPI In.
M/E Cut
178
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• 1080i/50
• 1080i/59.94
• 1080PsF/23.976
• 1080PsF/24
Action button
Status area display
a)
P/P AT
P/P Auto Trans
a)
P/P Cut
P/P Cut
• 1080PsF/25
• 1080PsF/29.97
• No Action
M/E Key1 Auto Trans M/E K1 AT
M/E Key1 Cut M/E K1 Cut
M/E Key2 Auto Trans M/E K2 AT
When [Screen Aspect] is selected: In the popup window,
press the following action buttons, to select the action
when the input goes to the high level/low level.
• 4:3
• 16:9
M/E Key2 Cut
DSK1 Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut
M/E K2 Cut
DSK1 AT
DSK1 Cut
DSK2 AT
DSK2 Cut
FTB AT
DSK2 Auto Trans
DSK2 Cut
• No Action
When [Level Enable] is selected: In the popup window,
press the following buttons, to select the action when
the input goes to the high level/low level.
• Enable
• Disable
• No Action
FTB Auto Trans
FTB Cut
FTB Cut
b)
SnapShot
Snapshot Recall ?
No Action
No Action
FM V Field
FM V Field Freeze
Note
FM V Frame
FM V Off
FM V Frame Freeze
FM V Freeze Off
FM K Field Freeze
FM K Frame Freeze
FM K Freeze Off
Macro Take
When using [Signal Format] and [Screen Aspect], set the
[Level Enable] GPI input to [Enable]. If this is not set to
[Enable], the GPI inputs are not valid.
FM K Field
FM K Frame
FM K Off
GPI outputs of the control panel
The GPI outputs of the control panel are fixed as follows,
so you need not make settings for them.
Macro
Port number
GPI-1
Action
a) 1.5 M/E panel only
b) When [Snapshot Recall ?] is selected, press [Register No] to set a register
number (1 to 99).
Error Status
GPI-2
No Action
Setting the action when the trigger type is [Level]
When the trigger type is [Level], press [Action] to display
a popup window, then you can select the following four
actions.
GPI-3
No Action
GPI-4
No Action
GPI-5
M/E Key1 On Status
M/E Key2 On Status
DSK1 On Status
DSK2 On Status
GPI-6
Action button
No Action
Status area display
No Action
Format
GPI-7
GPI-8
Signal Format
Screen Aspect
Level Enable
Aspect
Assigning GPI inputs to DCU parallel input
ports
Enable
When other than [No Action] is selected, you can set the
action separately for when the input is high level and when
the input is low level. To set the action when the input is
high level, press [High Level], and to set the action when
the input is low level, press [Low Level], to display a
popup window.
You can assign GPI inputs to DCU parallel input ports
which are not being used for tally external box input and
tally enable input.
more information about tally external box input and tally
enable input.
When [Signal Format] is selected: In the popup window,
press any of the following action buttons, to select the
action when the input goes to the high level/low level.
• 576i/50
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >DCU In
Config.
The DCU Input Config menu appears.
• 480i/59.94
• 720P/59.94
Other Settings
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The status area shows a list of DCU input ports with
their current signal assignments.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the GPI
input to set.
2
Using any of the following methods, select an input
port for the assignment. You can choose either a port
with no current assignment (No Assign), or a port with
an assignment. Then select the GPI input to assign.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (GPI)
GPI input number
selection
1 to 50
• Turn the knobs.
Knob
Description
Setting values
To change trigger type settings
Press [Trigger Type] to display a popup window, then
select the trigger type.
a)
1 (Port)
DCU input port number
selection
1 to 102
2 (GPI)
GPI input number
selection
1 to 50
(falling edge): Trigger is applied on the falling
edge of an input pulse.
(rising edge): Trigger is applied on the rising edge
of an input pulse.
(both edges): Trigger is applied on both falling and
rising edges of an input pulse.
a) For the MKS-2700, set in the range 1 to 34.
3
Press [GPI Set].
To clear GPI input assignments
Level: Trigger is applied when the input changes to low or
high.
Select an input port, as in step 2 of the above procedure,
then press [Clear].
Disable (disabled): Ignore input pulses.
Setting DCU GPI inputs
To change action settings
When the trigger type is other than [Level] or [Disable],
you can press [Action] to display a popup window and
select from the actions in the following table.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >DCU
GPI In.
The DCU GPI Input menu appears.
The status area shows the GPI input ports and the
trigger type and action settings of the signals input to
each port.
Note
If you change the trigger type setting from any of falling
edge, rising edge, and both edges to [Level], or vice versa,
the action is automatically changed to [No Action].
For details of the action when the trigger type is set to
Operating button
M/E Auto Trans
M/E Cut
Status area display
M/E AT
M/E Cut
a)
P/P AT
P/P Auto Trans
180
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating button
Status area display
a)
P/P Cut
P/P Cut
M/E Key1 Auto Trans
M/E Key1 Cut
M/E Key2 Auto Trans
M/E Key2 Cut
DSK1 Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut
M/E K1 AT
M/E K1 Cut
M/E K2 AT
M/E K2 Cut
DSK1 AT
DSK1 Cut
DSK2 AT
DSK2 Cut
FTB AT
DSK2 Auto Trans
DSK2 Cut
2
Using any of the following methods, select an output
port for the assignment. You can choose either a port
with no current assignment (No Assign), or a port with
an assignment. Then select the GPI output to assign.
FTB Auto Trans
FTB Cut
FTB Cut
b)
Snapshot
Snapshot Recall ?
No Action
No Action
FM V Field
FM V Frame
FM V Off
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
FM V Field Freeze
FM V Frame Freeze
FM V Freeze Off
FM K Field Freeze
FM K Frame Freeze
FM K Freeze Off
Macro Take
• Turn the knobs.
FM K Field
FM K Frame
FM K Off
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Port)
DCU output port
selection
1 and upwards
2 (GPI)
GPI output number
selection
1 to 50
Macro
c)
AUX O_Ride
AUX Bus Override
a) Output port numbers are sequential numbers with respect to number
pairs, the pairs consisting of a slot number (2 to 6) and a port number
(1 to 54).
a) 1.5 M/E panel only
b) When you select [Snapshot Recall ?], press [Register No] to select the
register number (1 to 99).
c) [AUX Bus Override] appears only when the trigger type is “falling edge”
or “rising edge”. If you select this action, press [Aux No] and [Input No]
to select the AUX bus number (1 to 4) and the input source number (1 to
16).
MKS-2700: Uses slot 2 only. Settings can be made in the range 1 to
36.
MKS-8700: The setting range varies depending on the number of
slots used.
3
Press [GPI Set].
Assigning GPI outputs to DCU parallel
output ports
You can assign GPI outputs to DCU parallel output ports
which are not being used for parallel tally output.
To clear GPI output assignments
Select an output port, as explained in step 2 of the previous
procedure, then press [Clear].
Setting DCU GPI outputs
more information about parallel tally output.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >DCU
GPI Out.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >DCU
Out Config.
The DCU GPI Output menu appears.
The status area shows the trigger type, output timing,
pulse width, and action settings of each GPI output
signal.
The DCU Output Config menu appears.
The status area shows the signals assigned to DCU
output ports.
Other Settings
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change pulse widths
When the trigger type is other than [Status] or [Disable],
turn knob 2 to set the pulse width.
Knob
Description
Setting values
2 (Pulse Width) Pulse width
1 to 60 (fields)
To change action settings
When the trigger type is [Status], you can press [Action] to
display a popup window and select from the actions shown
in the following table.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the GPI
output to set.
Operating button
M/E Key1 On
M/E Key2 On
DSK1 On
Status area display
M/E K1 On
M/E K2 On
DSK1 On
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
DSK2 On
DSK2 On
• Turn the knob.
Error
Error
Knob
Description
Setting values
No Action
No Action
1 (GPI)
GPI output number
selection
1 to 50
a)
Editor GPI
Editor GPI ?
a) When [Editor GPI ?] is selected, press [GPI No] and select an Editor GPI
number (1 to 32).
To change trigger type settings
Press [Trigger Type] to display a popup window, then
select the trigger type.
When the trigger type is other than [Status], the only
possible selections are [No Action] and [Editor GPI ?].
(falling edge): Trigger is applied on the falling
edge of an input pulse.
Note
(rising edge): Trigger is applied on the rising edge
of an input pulse.
[Editor GPI ?] can be used only when you have a valid
license for the BZS-8050 Editing Control Software.
(both edges): Trigger is applied on both falling and
rising edges of an input pulse.
Status: Trigger is applied when the relay status changes to
open or closed, or when the level changes to low or
high.
Tally Setup (System Tally Menu)
For details of the setup for tally signals to be output from
the switcher to external devices, see “Setting switcher GPI
outputs” in the section “GPI Input/Output Setup (GPI
Menu)” (page 176).
Disable (disabled): Input pulses are ignored.
To change output timings
When the trigger type is other than [Status] or [Disable],
you can press [Timing] to display a popup window and
select from the following timings.
Any: Output on the earliest field that can be processed.
Field 1: Output on field 1.
Use the System Tally menu to make settings related to
system tally.
Assigning switcher inputs and outputs to
the S-Bus space
Field 2: Output on field 2.
The MFS-2000 system uses the S-Bus protocol as its
interface to routers (routing switchers). Therefore it is
necessary to assign inputs and outputs of the switcher
and so on to an S-Bus space.
Note
You cannot set the timing when any of the following signal
formats are selected.
• 1080PsF/23.976
• 1080PsF/24
• 1080PsF/25
• 1080PsF/29.97
• 720P/59.94
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally
>S-Bus Assign.
The S-Bus Assign menu appears. The status area
shows the matrix size, source addresses, destination
addresses, and levels.
182
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Press [Matrix Size].
Note
The switcher (SWR) is displayed, but cannot be set
here. To make switcher settings, use the S-Bus Assign
menu.
A popup window appears.
Select the matrix size.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the
external box to set.
Standard 136 × 138: Assign the switcher S-Bus space
at full size. You can assign all switcher inputs and
outputs to the S-Bus space, but this causes some
waste of S-Bus space.
Compact 128 × 128: Assign the switcher S-Bus space
at compact size. It is not possible to assign all
switcher inputs and outputs to the S-Bus space, but
the S-Bus space can be used efficiently.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Ext Box No) External box selection 1 to 4
4
5
Press [S-Bus Assign].
3
4
Press [Matrix Size].
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.
A popup window appears.
Knob
Description
Setting values
Select the matrix size
a)
1 (Source)
Source start address
1 to 889
b)
No Assign: Do not use.
1 to 897
8 × 1: Select an external box with 8 inputs and 1
a)
2 (Destination) Destination start
address
1 to 887
1 to 897
output.
b)
16 × 1: Select an external box with 16 inputs and 1
3 (Level)
Level in S-Bus space 1 to 8
output.
32 × 1: Select an external box with 32 inputs and 1
a) When matrix size is Standard 136 × 138
b) When matrix size is Compact 128 × 128
output.
5
6
Press [S-Bus Assign].
Making external box settings
If you need to acquire the signal selection status of external
devices via parallel input, assign a matrix to S-Bus space
as an external selector (external box).
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally
>External Box.
2 (Source)
Source start address
1 to 1017
1 to 1009
1 to 993
b)
c)
The External Box menu appears. The status area
shows a list of device names, matrix sizes, source
addresses, destination addresses, and levels. “No
Assign” appears in the [Matrix Size] column of unused
external boxes.
3 (Destination) Destination start
address
1 to 1024
4 (Level)
Level in S-Bus space 1 to 8
a) When matrix size is 8 × 1
b) When matrix size is 16 × 1
c) When matrix size is 32 × 1
Other Settings
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To couple external boxes
4 Groups Connect: Group the data areas of Group 1
to 4 (or Group 5 to 8) and transfer as the tally
information of Group 1 (or Group 5).
2 Groups Connect: Group data areas in pairs Group
1/2 and Group 3/4 (or Group 5/6 and Group 7/8)
and transfer as the tally information of Group 1 (or
Group 5) and Group 3 (or Group 7).
For the external boxes that you want to connect, set the
same destinations and levels in step 6.
By coupling a number of external boxes, you can increase
the number of inputs.
Example:
External box 1: set to 8 × 1 size
External box 2: set to 32 × 1 size
By coupling these two external boxes, you obtain 40
inputs (=8+32).
Making tally generation settings
Use the following procedures to make tally generation
settings by setting destination, tally type, and input port
parameters, and to modify existing settings.
Making tally group settings
With the S-Bus protocol, tally control is possible for
groups 1 to 8, but in this system you can use either groups
1 to 4 or groups 5 to 8. You can select whether or not to
transfer tally information over the S-Bus, and select the
type of grouping.
To make new tally generation settings
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally
>Tally Enable.
The Tally Enable appears. The status area shows tally
setting information.
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally
>Group Tally.
The Group Tally menu appears.
2
Press [New], turning it on, and turn the knobs to set the
following parameters.
2
3
Press [Tally Group].
Knob
Description
Setting values
A popup window appears.
2 (Dest Add)
Source/destination 1 to 1024
address
Select the groups to use.
3 (Dest Lvl)
Destination level
Tally type
1 to 8
Group 1-4: Use groups 1 to 4.
Group 5-8: Use groups 5 to 8.
a)
4 (Tally Type)
1 (R1) to 8(G4)
a) The tally type display changes according to the tally group in use (R
is red tally, and G is green tally).
4
Press [S-Bus Tally] to select whether or not to transfer
tally information over the S-Bus.
Tally group
Tally type
Group 1-4
1: R1, 2: G1, 3: R2, 4: G2, 5: R3, 6:
G3, 7: R4, 8: G4
Each press toggles between On (transfer) and Off (do
not transfer).
Group 5-8
1: R5, 2: G5, 3: R6, 4: G6, 5: R7, 6:
G7, 7: R8, 8: G8
5
6
Press [Tally Gp Sel].
3
4
Press [Tally Enable].
A popup window appears.
A popup window appears.
Select the type of grouping.
Set the tally generation conditions.
Separate: Do not group. Transfer tally information
separately for each of the eight tallies.
Tally Input: Generate a tally when a tally input port is
active.
184
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enable: Always generate a tally.
Disable: Never generate a tally.
5
6
If you selected Tally Input in step 4, turn knob 5 to
select the tally input port.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
5 (Input No) Tally input port number
1 to 102
a) For the MKS-2700, set in the range 1 to 34.
Press [Set].
2
Using any of the following methods, select a tally
output port.
To modify existing tally settings
1
2
If [New] is on, turn it off.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Using any of the following methods, select the tally
settings to modify.
• Turn the knobs.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Slot)
Slot number selection
2 to 6
b)
• Turn the knob.
2 (Port)
Port number selection
1 to 54
a) For the MKS-2700, set to 2.
b) For the MKS-2700, set in the range 1 to 34.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (No)
Tally selection
1 and upwards
3
4
Press [Src/Dest].
3
4
With reference to steps 2 to 5 in the preceding section
“Making new tally generation settings,” change the
parameters as required.
A popup window appears.
Select whether to assign a source or a destination to the
port.
Press [Set].
To delete tally generation settings
Select tally settings by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of the
previous procedure “To modify existing tally settings”,
then press [Delete].
Source: Assign a source.
Dest: Assign a destination.
5
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.
Making parallel tally settings
Knob
Description
Setting values
Proceed as follows to set the source and destination
addresses, level, and tally type for each parallel port.
3 (Address)
Source or
destination address
1 to 1024
a)
4 (Level)
Destination level
1 to 8
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally
>Parallel Tally.
b)
5 (Tally Type) Tally type
1 (R1) to 8 (G4)
a) The level setting is required only when destination was selected in
step 4.
b) The tally type display changes according to the tally group in use (R
is red tally, and G is green tally).
Parallel Tally menu appears. The status areas shows
setting information for each port.
Tally group Tally type
Group 1-4
1: R1, 2: G1, 3: R2, 4: G2, 5: R3, 6:
G3, 7: R4, 8: G4
Group 5-8
1: R5, 2: G5, 3: R6, 4: G6, 5: R7, 6:
G7, 7: R8, 8: G8
6
Press [Set].
Other Settings
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To delete parallel tally settings
In step 2, select a tally port and press [Clear].
3
4
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.
Knob
Description
Setting values
Making wiring settings
2 (Dest Add)
3 (Dest Lvl)
4 (Src Add)
5 (Src Lvl)
Destination address 1 to 1024
When configuring a system in which the switcher inputs
and outputs are connected to a router, it is necessary to set
up this connection configuration (referred to as “wiring”)
in the S-Bus space.
Destination level
Source address
Source level
1 to 8
1 to 1024
1 to 8
Press [Set].
To make new wiring settings
To sort wiring settings
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally
Wiring.
1
2
Select a wiring setting by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of
“To modify wiring settings,” then press [Sort].
The Wiring menu appears. The status areas shows
wiring information.
A popup window appears.
Execute the sort by selecting one of the following sort
orders.
Dest: Destination level/address
The wiring settings are sorted as follows.
Ascending order (smallest first) by destination
level t ascending order by destination address
t ascending order by source level t ascending
order by source address.
Source: Source level/address
The wiring settings are sorted as follows.
Ascending order (smallest first) by source level
t ascending order by source address t
Ascending order by destination level t
ascending order by destination address.
2
3
Press [New], turning it on, and turn the knobs to set the
following parameters.
Knob
Description
Setting values
To delete wiring settings
Select a wiring setting by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of “To
modify wiring settings,” then press [Delete].
1 (Dest From) Destination start
address
1 to 1024
2 (Dest To)
Destination end
address
1 to 1024
Copying tallies
You can copy tally source information to another tally
source.
3 (Dest Lvl)
4 (Src From)
5 (Src Lvl)
Destination level
1 to 8
Source start address 1 to 1024
Source level 1 to 8
To make new tally copy settings
Press [Set].
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally
>Tally Copy.
To modify wiring settings
1
2
If [New] is on, turn it off.
The Tally Copy menu appears. The status area shows
the current tally copy settings.
Using any of the following methods, select the wiring
setting to modify.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (No)
Wiring number selection 1 and upwards
186
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Select one of the following to execute the sort.
From Source: Sort in ascending order (smallest first)
by From Source name.
To Source: Sort in ascending order by To Source
name.
To delete tally copy settings
Select a copy setting by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of “To
modify tally copy settings,” then press [Delete].
External Device Connection Port
Setup (Device Menu)
2
3
Press [New], turning it on, then turn the knobs to set
the following parameters.
To control external devices connected to the RS-422A 9-
pin serial ports of the DCU, use the Device menu to make
port settings.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (CP FR (FR)) Copy-from source
start address
1 to 1024
information about controlling external devices.
2 (CP FR (To)) Copy-from source
end address
1 to 1024
3 (CP To (FR)) Copy-to source start 1 to 1024
address
Assigning devices to DCU ports
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Device >Port
Assign.
Press [Set].
A new tally copy setting based on the settings made in
The Port Assign menu appears. The status area shows
a list of devices currently assigned to ports, together
with information about how they are controlled.
step 2 is added.
To modify tally copy settings
1
2
If [New] is on, turn it off.
Device control settings are made in the Device Assign
Using any of the following methods, select the setting
to change.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (No)
Copy setting selection
1 and upwards
3
4
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 to 1024
2
Using any of the following methods, select the target
port for a device assignment.
2 (CP From)
3 (CP To)
Copy-from source
Copy-to source
1 to 1024
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Press [Set].
To sort tally copy settings
• Turn the knob.
1
Select a copy setting by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of
“To modify tally copy settings,” then press [Sort].
A popup window appears.
Other Settings
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By default, ports have names in the format “PORT S-
P.”
S: A slot number (2 to 6)
P: A port number (1 to 6)
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
1 (Port)
Port selection
1 and upwards
a) Output port numbers are sequential numbers with respect to number
pairs, the pairs consisting of a slot number (2 to 6) and a port number
(1 to 54).
Making control settings for devices
assigned to ports
Make the following settings
• Assignments of devices assigned to the various ports to
the device selection buttons (Device1 to Device6)
• Selection of whether or not to operate from an editing
keyboard
MKS-2700: Uses slot 2 only. Settings can be made in the range 1 to
36.
MKS-8700: The setting range varies depending on the number of
slots used.
3
4
Press [Dev Type].
A popup window opens.
• For disc recorders and Extended VTRs, selection of
devices to share file lists with
Select the type of device to assign.
VTR: VTR
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally
>Device Assign.
DDR SD9P: Disk recorder (Sony Disk 9-pin Protocol)
DDR VDCP: Disk recorder (Video Disk
Communications Protocol)
Extended VTR: Extended VTR
Mixer: Audio mixer
The Device Assign menu appears. The status areas
shows the devices assigned to the various ports,
together with information about how the devices are
controlled.
No Assign: No assignment
5
Press [Port Setting] to make the detailed settings
required to control the specific device you plan to
connect.
See the following sections for more information about
how to make detailed settings for the various device
types.
• “Making detailed settings for disk recorders (Sony
Disk 9-pin Protocol)” (page 190)
• “Making detailed settings for disk recorders (Video
• “Making detailed settings for Extended VTRs”
2
Using any of the following methods, select a target
port.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Note
Audio mixers cannot be operated from this system. If
you have a valid BZS-8050 license, operation from an
editing keyboard is possible.
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description
Setting values
To rename a port
You can rename ports by assigning names of up to 8
characters.
a)
1 (Port)
Port number selection
1 and upwards
a) Output port numbers are sequential numbers with respect to number
pairs, the pairs consisting of a slot number (2 to 6) and a port number
(1 to 54).
1
2
Select a port by carrying out step 2 of “Assigning
devices to ports.”
MKS-2700: Uses slot 2 only. Settings can be made in the range 1 to
36.
MKS-8700: The setting range varies depending on the number of
slots used.
Press [Rename].
3
4
Press [Assign].
The keyboard window appears.
A popup window appears.
3
Enter a name and press [Enter].
Select a device selection button, which will select the
device on the selected port.
To return to the default name, press [Default Name].
188
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DEV1 to DEV6: [Device1] to [Device6] buttons
No Assign: Do not assign a device selection button
5
Press [Plug In Editor], and select whether or not to
enable operation of the selected device from an editing
keyboard.
Notes
• A valid BZS-8050 license is required for operation from
an editing keyboard.
• When the device on the selected port is an audio mixer,
[Enable] is selected automatically. This setting cannot be
changed.
VTR detailed settings screen
1
Using any of the following methods, select a VTR
constant byte to set.
To share file lists
1
2
Select a port as in step 2, then press [File List].
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
A popup window appears.
• Turn the knob.
Select the devices with which the device on the
selected port will share file lists.
Knob
Description
Setting values
3 (No)
VTR constant selection 1 to 16
Note
Select devices of the same type for file list sharing.
2
3
Press [VTR Cnst Set].
The hexadecimal keypad window (see page 35)
appears.
Making detailed settings for devices
assigned to DCU ports
After selecting a device type for a DCU port, you need to
make detailed settings to enable control of the external
device that you plan to connect to that port.
Use the Port Setting menu to make detailed settings for
specific devices.
To display the Port setting menu, select the device that you
want to set in the status area of the Port Assign menu (see
page 187) and press [Port Setting].
You can also select a device in the Port Setting menu by
turning knob 1.
Enter a value and press [Enter].
This sets one byte of the VTR constants.
Return to step 1 and repeat as required.
4
5
Press [TC Source].
A popup window appears.
Select the timecode source.
LTC: Use LTC only.
LTC:VITC: Switch automatically between LTC and
VITC.
Knob
Description
Setting values
1 (Port)
Port selection
1 and upwards
CTL: Use CTL pulses or timer counter pulses. Select
this only for tapes on which no timecode is
recorded.
To return from the Port Setting to the Port Assign menu,
press [Port Assign] in the Port Setting menu.
VTR constant settings
Set VTR constant values in the range from 00 to FF for the
following items.
Making detailed settings for VTRs
The following settings are required for VTRs.
• The VTR constants of your VTR
• Selection of the timecode source (signal used to derive
timecode for determining tape position)
The status area of the Port Setting menu for VTR devices
shows information about the selected port and a list of the
bytes in the VTR constants.
Other Settings
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3:Play After Cueup Delay (delay time from the cued-up state to
begin playback)
4:Play After Open Next Delay (delay time from the Open Next state
to begin playback)
Block
Byte
Setting
Block1
1
2
3
HI-BYTE (DEVICE TYPE)
LO-BYTE (DEVICE TYPE)
2
3
Turn knob 4 to set the response time.
HI-BYTE (FRAME) (PREROLL
TIME)
Knob
Description
Setting values
4
LO-BYTE (FRAME) (PREROLL
TIME)
4 (Setting) Response time
0 to 255
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EDIT DELAY (FRAME)
EE DELAY (FRAME)
OVER RUN (FRAME)
TRAJECTORY
Press [Set].
The setting is confirmed.
Making detailed settings for disk recorders
(Video Disk Communications Protocol)
The following settings are required for disk recorders
using the Video Disk Communications Protocol (called
“DDR VDCP” below).
• Selection of whether to use the disk recorder as a
recorder or as a player
• Video port number
Block2
TC READ DELAY (FRAME)
START DELAY (FRAME)
AFTER SYNC DELAY –
AFTER SYNC DELAY +
MODE1
MODE2
• Response times until command execution
MAX PRRL SPEED
QUICK PVW PRRL TIME (FRAME)
The status area of the Port Setting menu for DDR VDCP
devices shows information about the selected port, a video
port, and a list of response times.
Making detailed settings for disk recorders (Sony
Disk 9-pin Protocol)
For disk recorders using the Sony Disk 9-pin Protocol
(called “DDR SD9P” below), settings are required to
specify response times until command execution.
The status area of the Port Setting menu for DDR SD9P
devices shows information about the selected port and a
list of response times.
DDR VDCP detailed settings screen
1
2
Press [DDR Type].
A popup window opens.
Select Player or Recorder.
DDR SD9P detailed settings screen
Player: Functions as player.
Recorder: Functions as recorder.
1
Using any of the following methods, select a response
time to set.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the video
port or a response time to set.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description
Setting values
• Turn the knob.
a)
3 (No)
Setting item selection
1 to 4
a) 1:Maximum Open Delay (maximum time required to open a file)
2:Maximum Cueup Delay (maximum time required to cue up a file)
190
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Turn the knob to set the response time.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
3 (No)
Setting item selection
1 to 5
Knob
Description
Setting values
a) 1:Video Port (port associated with the serial port being set. The
output port of a player, and the input port of a recorder.)
4 (Setting) Response time
0 to 255
2:Maximum Open Delay (maximum time required to open a file)
3:Maximum Cueup Delay (maximum time required to cue up a file)
Press [Set].
4:Play After Cueup Delay (delay time from the cued-up state to
begin playback)
The setting is confirmed.
5:Stop Delay (delay time from Stop command to actual stop)
4
5
Turn knob 4 to set the video port or the response time.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
4 (Setting) Video port number
setting
0 to 127
Response time
0 to 255
a) 0: No assignment
Press [Set].
The setting is confirmed.
Making detailed settings for Extended VTRs
For Extended VTRs, settings are required to specify
response times until command execution.
The status area of the Port Setting menu for Extended VTR
devices shows information about the selected port and a
list of response times.
Extended VTR detailed settings screen
1
Using any of the following methods, select a response
time to set.
• Press directry on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob
Description
Setting values
a)
3 (No)
Setting item selection
1 to 4
a) 1:Maximum Open Delay (maximum time required to open a file)
2:Maximum Cueup Delay (maximum time required to cue up a file)
3:Play After Cueup Delay (delay time from the cued-up state to
begin playback)
4:Stop Delay (delay time from Stop command to actual stop)
Other Settings
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Other Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Border
Index
A
Advanced Operations
Color Corrector Board (MKS-2420M)
Control Panel
Copying or swapping color corrector
Creating a pair from a video signal and
Cropping
Auto transition
C
Channel
AUX Bus Remote Panel (MKS-8080)
AUX Bus Remote Panel (MKS-8082)
Cross-point buttons
B
Basic operations
Clear button
changing the position and size of
using internally generated signals
Close button
D
video switching on the M/E bank
video switching on the PGM/PST
DEVICE/UTILITY operation buttons
Index
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frame Memory Board Set (MKS-
Enter button
Downstream key/fade to black control
DSK independent transition execution
External device connection port setup
F
G
E
Edge
GPI inputs setting
File list (disk recorder/Extended VTR)
Effect
batch operating on data files of
deleting the data of selected
loading the data of selected
GPI outputs
H
selecting the background of a 2-
selecting with the Flexi Pad
operating on individual data files
Effect direction
saving the data of selected
I
selecting with the Effect/Wipe
Flow of operations
Input/Output Connector Board (MKS-
Effect pattern
changing the position and size of
Effect snapshot
using internally generated signals
J
194
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main menu
K
Key
N
Next transition
Menu
O
selecting by entering page
selecting by navigating the menu
selecting from the display history
P
L
Pattern position and size
PGM/PST cross-point control block
Phase adjustments through mode
M
Index
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transition
Power Supply Unit (for control panels)
Power Supply Unit (for MFS-2000)
Transition execution section
Transition rate
System
Transition rates
setting with the Flexi Pad control
Transition type selection buttons
R
U
S
V
Selecting video
Video switching
T
W
Window (for chroma key adjustment)
196
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X
Y
Index
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The material contained in this manual consists of information
that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely
for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this
manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other
than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described
in this manual without the express written permission of Sony
Corporation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sony Corporation
B & P Company
MFS-2000
(SY)
Printed in Japan
2005.02.13
© 2004
http://www.sony.net/
Printed on 100% recycled paper
3-855-579-02(1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Sharp All in One Printer MFP Series User Manual
Sharp Microwave Oven R 1900M User Manual
Sharp Projector XG MB50X 2000 User Manual
Soleus Air Air Conditioner SG TTW 09ESE 26 User Manual
Sony Camcorder 3 286 590 121 User Manual
Sony CD Player CDX 4000X User Manual
Sony Microphone ECM PC60 User Manual
Sony Portable Speaker SS SRX7 User Manual
Stiga Lawn Mower 13 2502 17 User Manual
Summit Car Seat ENG 4358 3412E User Manual